Professional Documents
Culture Documents
0 Reference Manual
Chief Architect
6500 N. Mineral Dr.
Coeur dAlene, Idaho 83815
www.chiefarchitect.com
Chapter 1: Overview
Introduction .........................................................................................1
Chief Architect Full vs. Base ..............................................................1
The Chief Architect Environment .....................................................2
Chief Architect Terms.........................................................................4
Chief Architect Interface ....................................................................4
Selecting Objects..................................................................................8
Editing Selected Objects ...................................................................10
Drawing a Plan ..................................................................................11
Viewing Your Plan ............................................................................12
Program Updates...............................................................................15
Getting Help .......................................................................................16
Contents
Contents
ii
Contents
Chapter 5: Layers
Chapter Overview ...........................................................................119
Layer Display Options Dialog ........................................................119
Layer Tab .........................................................................................123
Select CAD Layer Dialog ................................................................124
iii
iv
Contents
Editing Walls....................................................................................147
Editing Curved Walls......................................................................148
Editing Walls in Elevation Views...................................................151
Connecting Walls.............................................................................152
Aligning Walls..................................................................................153
CAD to Walls ...................................................................................155
Wall Type Definitions......................................................................156
Wall Type Definitions Dialog .........................................................157
Exporting Wall Definitions.............................................................160
Importing Wall Definitions.............................................................161
Curved Walls and Roofs .................................................................161
Special Walls ....................................................................................163
The Wall Specification Dialog ........................................................166
Wall Hatch Specification Dialog ....................................................180
Wall/Railing/Fencing Defaults Setup.............................................181
Chapter 7: Rooms
Chapter Overview ...........................................................................185
Room Defaults..................................................................................186
Room Material Defaults..................................................................186
Floor and Ceiling Materials............................................................186
Wall Materials .................................................................................187
Floor & Ceiling Heights ..................................................................187
Room Definition...............................................................................189
Decks.................................................................................................189
Selecting a Room..............................................................................191
Room Specification..........................................................................191
Displaying Room Labels .................................................................193
Special Ceilings ................................................................................196
Room Polylines.................................................................................199
Chapter 8: Doors
Chapter Overview ........................................................................... 209
Door Defaults ...................................................................................209
The Door Tools ................................................................................ 210
Displaying Doors.............................................................................. 211
Selecting Doors ................................................................................ 212
Deleting Doors.................................................................................. 212
Copying Doors ................................................................................. 213
Moving Doors...................................................................................214
Changing Door Swings.................................................................... 215
Resizing Doors ................................................................................. 217
Special Doors....................................................................................218
Door Specification Dialog ............................................................... 219
Door Defaults ...................................................................................229
Chapter 9: Windows
Chapter Overview ........................................................................... 231
Window Defaults ............................................................................. 231
Window Types ................................................................................ 232
Window Levels................................................................................. 237
Displaying Windows........................................................................ 238
Selecting Windows........................................................................... 238
Deleting Windows............................................................................ 239
Copying Windows............................................................................ 239
Moving Windows............................................................................. 240
Resizing Windows............................................................................ 241
vi
Contents
vii
viii
Contents
ix
Contents
Roof Trusses.....................................................................................408
Deleting Trusses...............................................................................410
Copying Trusses...............................................................................410
Moving Trusses................................................................................410
Editing Truss Shape in Cross Section View ..................................411
Truss Details.....................................................................................412
Truss Labels .....................................................................................412
Mixing Trusses with Stick Framing...............................................413
Truss Base ........................................................................................413
Hip Trusses.......................................................................................417
Girder Trusses .................................................................................421
Scissors Trusses ...............................................................................422
Truss Base Specification Dialog .....................................................422
Roof Truss Specification Dialog .....................................................424
Floor/Ceiling Truss Specification Dialog.......................................427
xi
xii
Contents
Resizing Cabinets.............................................................................466
Editing Cabinets ..............................................................................467
Editing the Cabinet Door/Drawer Style ........................................469
Editing Custom Countertops..........................................................469
Attaching Cabinets ..........................................................................471
Special Cabinets...............................................................................472
Cabinet Specification Dialog ..........................................................475
Shelf/Partition Specification Dialog...............................................485
Custom Countertop Specification Dialog......................................486
Cabinet Defaults Setup....................................................................487
xiii
xiv
Contents
xv
xvi
Contents
xvii
xviii
Contents
Walkthroughs ..................................................................................636
Creating Cross Section/Elevation Views .......................................637
Editing Cross Section/Elevation Views..........................................638
Saving Cross Section/Elevation Cameras......................................639
Displaying Cross Section/Elevation Views ....................................640
Camera Specification Dialog ..........................................................641
Cross Section/Elevation Camera Specification.............................642
Camera Defaults ..............................................................................643
3D Settings........................................................................................645
xix
xx
Contents
xxi
xxii
Contents
xxiii
xxiv
Contents
Resizing an Image............................................................................833
Adding Images to the Library ........................................................834
Image Specification Dialog .............................................................834
Windows Metafiles ..........................................................................837
Walkthroughs ..................................................................................838
VRML...............................................................................................840
xxv
Materials........................................................................................... 877
Openings........................................................................................... 878
Floor Plan View ............................................................................... 879
Closing the Create Symbol Wizard ............................................... 880
Symbol Specification Dialog ........................................................... 880
xxvi
Contents
xxvii
xxviii
Chapter 1:
Overview
Overview
Introduction
Note: This chapter is similar to the Overview
chapter in the Getting Started Guide. If you
have already read the Getting Started Guide,
you may want to proceed to the next chapter.
Chapter Contents
Object-Based Design
Working drawings can be created efficiently
with Chief Architects object-based design
technology. Instead of working with the
many lines that define objects such as walls,
doors, windows appliances and furniture,
simply select the object itself. Specification
dialogs allow you to define an objects
dimensions, placement, style, materials, and
other design elements. You can even select
and edit an object in 3D views for instant
results.
Walls are usually the first things drawn in
Chief Architect. Walls can be simple two line
graphical representations; or they can be
drawn to show an entire assembly. Position
and thickness of walls can both be defined.
Rooms are defined by walls. Each room
must have one and only one complete,
unbroken boundary that defines it. Rooms
can be created from a combination of walls,
invisible walls, railings, and invisible
railings. By defining the room type, common
characteristics associated with that type of
room will be applied. For example, a room
defined as a "deck" will not produce a roof
when roofs are automatically generated.
Toolbar buttons offer convenience, familiarity, and the ability to customize the
interface.
Customizable Toolbars
Customizable toolbars are among the most
popular features of Chief Architect. Since the
work being done determines the tools
needed, Chief Architect allows you to tailor
toolbars to suit your own needs; preserve
your customizations between sessions; and
even store different toolbar button
configurations for future use.
Default and
Preference Settings
Chief Architects Defaults allow you to
tailor the objects used in the program to
match the objects they represent in real life.
You can change your default windows or
doors to match those available from your
supplier before placing them in your plan.
Overview
Setup the material list categories, subcategories, and report style, as well as
manufacturer and supplier information.
Toolbars
Toolbars and toolbar buttons provide the
fastest, easiest way to access most program
features. You can move the toolbars or
customize them by adding or removing
buttons or by creating your own toolbars
from scratch.
Most buttons in the toolbars display
regardless of the active mode or view. CAD
mode and architectural mode each have
mode-specific toolbars and toolbar buttons.
When you pass the pointer over a toolbar
button or above a pull down menu item, a
brief help message appears in the status bar.
Whenever you see one of these messages,
Overview
Menus
Chief Architect utilizes a standard Windows
menu format. The menus appear below the
title bar in the program window. In this
reference manual, menu paths will be written
as Build> Window> Box Window.
The Window submenu of the Build menu is
shown below.
Status Bar
The status bar at the bottom of the main
window displays information relative to the
current state of the program.
displayed
Dialogs
Dialogs are used to enter sizes and other
information to move and edit objects within
the program. Many dialogs have a preview to
show you how the changes made affect the
selected object. To see the picture of the
object update in the dialog as numbers are
changed, click in a different box or press
the Tab key on the keyboard.
Every Chief Architect object has its own
unique specification dialog which allows for
data related to the object to be detailed. This
dialog is referred to as the objects
Specification dialog and can be accessed by
selecting the object and clicking the Open
Object
edit button. Some objects will
open their Specification dialog if you doubleclick on them in Select Objects
mode
Entering Dimensions
When using Imperial units, lengths and
distances are entered as inches or feet and
inches, in either decimal or fractional form.
When using Metric units, millimeters are
used for all metric distances.
Dynamic Defaults
Dynamic defaults are values that can be set
or changed globally throughout a model. In a
dialog, dynamic default values are followed
by a "(D)", indicating that the value can be
changed in the default setup for that type of
object and all objects in the model of the
same type will be updated automatically.
Any object for which one of these values has
been previously edited it will not be updated
when the default value is changed.
To edit a dynamic default, the "(D)" must be
deleted or the default value will be reapplied
automatically. To reset a value to the
dynamic default, or to see if a value is
dynamic, type a "d" in an entry box. If a new
value appears with the "(D)" following it,
then the value is dynamic. If the box will not
accept a "d" as an entry, the value does not
have a dynamic default.
For values that do not have dynamic defaults,
you can group select related objects and
change the settings for all selected objects in
the specification dialog.
Overview
Shortcut Keys
Many commands can be initiated directly
from the keyboard. A standard way of
opening menus and menu items is using the
Alt + access key. Press Alt on your keyboard
and press one of the access keys that become
underlined letter in the menu names.
Some of the function keys located across the
top of the keyboard can be used to access
Chief Architect commands. For more
information about the available menu items,
toolbar buttons, and shortcut keys, see
Menus and Toolbar Buttons on page 17.
Windows
Window has two meanings in Chief
Architect. The first is a window object that is
placed into a wall. The second type of
windows are the views within a software
program. Chief Architect can create many
Selecting Objects
"Select" refers to selecting an object for
editing. Selecting an object is the first step in
most edit operations in Chief Architect.
is off.
Select Objects
Any architectural object can be
selected in floor plan view using the
Select Objects
Selecting Objects
is on.
Marquee Select
Multiple objects can be selected by holding
down the Shift key when the Select Objects
tool is active and dragging a marquee
around the objects to be selected. Once an
object has been selected, the marquee-select
method can no longer be used.
Depending on the object, the marquee must
cross at least one half of the object for it to be
selected; some objects will be selected if they
are touched by the marquee at all. This
method will work for free-standing objects
only: it cannot be used to select walls,
windows or doors.
Group Select
You can select a group of objects by adding
them to the selection set one-by-one. This
method is required to select multiple walls or
openings but can be used for free-standing
objects as well.
Select an object, hold down the Shift key, and
click on additional objects to select them.
Only fixed objects of a similar type, such as
walls, doors or windows, can be selected
using this method. With free standing
objects, more than one type can be selected
using this method, but the ability to edit the
group-selected items will be limited to
characteristics they all have in common.
Overview
Place the pointer over the triangular handle to reveal a circular arrow which
allows you to rotate the object.
Ctrl
key while
10
Drawing a Plan
Overview
In 3D Views
Most objects can be selected and edited in
vector views and render views as well.
Changes can be made to the size, shape, and
Drawing a Plan
iWhen you draw a plan in Chief Architect,
you are not just drawing lines: you are
placing 3D objects that represent building
components.
The program comes with default settings so
that you can immediately start drawing
plans. It is recommended that you review
these default settings and customize them to
match your drawing and building methods.
See Defaults & Preferences on page 87.
The following is a brief overview of the
recommended order for creating plans:
1.
2.
3.
11
4.
5.
6.
Draw interior walls next. Use the dimension tools to adjust the walls and correctly size your rooms.
7.
8.
9.
12
Overview
Vector Views
13
Wall Elevation
Render Views
Render views are 3D views of the
model that are more photo realistic
14
Program Updates
Overview
Raytrace View
Final View
Program Updates
From time to time, Chief Architect releases
program updates that are made available for
download, free of charge, from the Chief
Architect web site.
15
Getting Help
and newer you can view the documentation right on your computer. All Cross
References and page numbers can be
clicked to jump directly to that page.
Select Help> View Reference Manual,
or Help> View Getting Started Guide
to view the electronic documentation.
Press the Help button in any of the dialogs to open the online help for more
information about that dialog.
16
Chapter 2:
Menus &
Tools
Menus and
Toolbar Buttons
Chapter Overview
Using Chief Architects menus is a good way
to familiarize yourself with the program.
They provide a convenient way to access
almost 100% of the programs functionality.
Chief Architect simplifies access to much of
the programs functionality through the use
of toolbars and toolbar buttons. Toolbars
contain toolbar buttons which are basically
short cuts to specific functions, or "tools",
within the program. Toolbars are often more
convenient to work with than menus.
Chief Architect has many preset toolbars that
display at different times, depending on your
current mode or view. You can customize all
but the Edit toolbar, a toolbar that appears
whenever an object is selected. New toolbars
can also be created for each mode or view.
Chapter Contents
17
Tools Tab
4
5
2
3
18
or Wall
Cabinets
to other toolbars by dragging it
from the Toolbar Customization dialog
to the desired location.
Toolbar Tab
2
3
4
5
7
19
Menus &
Tools
Configurations Tab
2
3
4
5
20
Toolbar Configurations
Chief Architect has many different toolbar
buttons and only a limited amount of space to
contain them, which depends on your
monitors size and screen resolution settings.
21
Menus &
Tools
monitors.
22
Restoring Toolbars
Restoring Toolbars
File Menu
The File menu contains options related to
opening, closing, saving, exporting, and
printing files.
Menu
Command
File> New Plan
File> New Layout
Tool Keyboard
Button Shortcut
Ctrl + N
Effect
Create a new plan file. See Creating a New Plan
on page 72.
Create a new layout file. See Creating a Layout
File on page 905.
23
Menus &
Tools
Menu
Command
Tool Keyboard
Button Shortcut
Ctrl + O
File> Open
Layout...
File> Open
Template...
File> Manage
Auto Archives...
File> Close
N/A
Ctrl + W
or F4
File> Save
N/A
Ctrl + S
File> Export>
Entire Plan...
File> Export>
Current View
(DWG,DXF)...
24
Effect
Shift + F4
Tool Keyboard
Button Shortcut
Effect
File> Export> 3D
Model (DWG,
DXF)...
File> Export>
VRML (WRL)...
File> Export>
POV-Ray
(POV)...
File> Export>
Metafile(WMF,
EMF)...
File> Export>
Picture (BMP,
JPG, PNG)...
File> Export>
N/A
Wall Definitions...
File> Export>
Layer Sets...
File> Import>
Drawing (DWG,
DXF)...
File> Import>
Picture (BMP,
JPG, PNG)...
Shift + F3
25
Menus &
Tools
Menu
Command
Menu
Command
Tool Keyboard
Button Shortcut
File> Import>
Backdrop
File> Import>
N/A
Wall Definitions...
File> Import>
Layer Sets...
File> Import>
Terrain...
File> Print>
Center Sheet
Alt + F3
Alt + F2
File> Print>
Print...
Ctrl + P
26
Effect
Tool Keyboard
Button Shortcut
Effect
N/A
File> Send to
Layout...
File> Exit
N/A
Names of Plans
Most Recently
Opened
N/A
Edit Menu
The Edit menu contains the options for
manipulating items. Many of these editing
options also have a toolbar button and/or a
Menu
Command
Tool Keyboard
Button Shortcut
Effect
Edit> Undo
Ctrl + Z
Edit> Redo
Ctrl + Y
Ctrl + X
Edit> Cut
N/A
27
Menus &
Tools
Menu
Command
Menu
Command
Tool Keyboard
Button Shortcut
Edit> Copy
Ctrl + C
Ctrl + V
Edit> Delete
Delete
Edit> Delete
Objects...
Ctrl +
Spacebar
Spacebar
Ctrl + E
Edit> Paste
N/A
28
Effect
Ctrl + H
Edit> Default
Settings...
Edit> Default
Settings> Reset to
Defaults...
Edit> Preferences...
Tool Keyboard
Button Shortcut
N/A
Effect
Reset a part or all of the plan to the defaults for
roof information, floor and ceiling heights, and
wall heights. See Reset to Defaults on page
93.
Shift + ~
Build Menu
The Build menu accesses the tools used to
build the 3D model in Chief Architect. Each
arrowhead indicates a submenu which
Menu
Command
Build> Wall>
Exterior Wall
Tool Keyboard
Button Shortcut
Shift + Q
Effect
Draw walls using the Exterior wall type as
defined in the Wall Defaults dialog. See
Exterior and Interior Walls on page 131.
Build> Wall>
Foundation Wall
Build> Wall>
Invisible Wall
Ctrl + Q
29
Menus &
Tools
Menu
Command
Menu
Command
Tool Keyboard
Button Shortcut
Effect
Draw a deck bound by a railings as defined in
the Deck Railing Defaults dialog. See
Deck Railings on page 132.
page 132.
Build> Wall>
Retaining Wall
30
Ctrl + B
Build> Wall> 2 - 12
Inch Walls
Tool Keyboard
Button Shortcut
Effect
Shift + E
Build> Door>
Doorway
N/A
Build> Door>
Doorway Library...
Build> Window>
Window
31
Menus &
Tools
Menu
Command
Menu
Command
Effect
Build> Window>
Window Library...
Shift + X
Build> Floor>
Exchange with Floor
Above
Build> Floor>
Exchange with Floor
Below
32
Tool Keyboard
Button Shortcut
Shift + F
Build> Floor>
Rebuild Slabs
Tool Keyboard
Button Shortcut
Effect
Ctrl + R
Build> Roof>
Skylight
N/A
33
Menus &
Tools
Menu
Command
Menu
Command
34
Tool Keyboard
Button Shortcut
Effect
Build> Structure>
Square Pad
Build> Structure>
Slab
Build> Structure>
Slab with Footing
Build> Structure>
Slab Hole
Build> Structure>
Slab Hole with
Footing
Build> Structure>
Platform Hole
Build> Framing>
Build Framing...
Build> Framing>
Rafter
Build> Framing>
Roof Blocking
Build> Framing>
Roof Truss
Build> Framing>
Roof Beam
Build> Framing>
Joist
Build> Framing>
Joist Blocking
Tool Keyboard
Button Shortcut
Effect
Build> Framing>
Floor/Ceiling Truss
Build> Framing>
Floor/Ceiling Beam
Build> Framing>
Post
Build> Framing>
Framing Reference
Marker
Build> Framing>
Bearing Line
Build> Framing>
Joist Direction
Build> Trim>
Molding Polyline
Build> Trim>
Molding Line
Build> Trim> 3D
Molding Polyline
Build> Trim> 3D
Molding Line
Build> Trim>
Millwork Library...
35
Menus &
Tools
Menu
Command
Menu
Command
Build> Stairs>
Straight Stairs
Tool Keyboard
Button Shortcut
Shift + Y
Shift + T
Ctrl + T
36
Effect
Build> Cabinet>
Shelf
Build> Cabinet>
Partition
Build> Cabinet>
Custom Countertop
Build> Cabinet>
Custom Counter Hole
Build> Cabinet>
Cabinet Library...
Build> Cabinet>
Cabinet Door
Library...
Tool Keyboard
Button Shortcut
Effect
Build> Fireplace
Build> Electrical>
110V Outlet
Build> Electrical>
220V Outlet
Build> Electrical>
Light
Build> Electrical>
Switch
Build> Electrical>
Electrical Library...
Build> Electrical>
Auto Place Outlets
Build> Electrical>
Connect Electrical
Terrain Menu
Menu
Command
Tool Keyboard
Button Shortcut
Effect
Terrain> Create
Terrain Perimeter
Terrain> Terrain
Specification...
37
Menus &
Tools
Menu
Command
Menu
Command
38
Tool Keyboard
Button Shortcut
Effect
Terrain> Build
Terrain
Terrain> Clear
Terrain
Terrain> Elevation
Data> Elevation Point
Terrain> Elevation
Data> Elevation Line
Terrain> Elevation
Data> Elevation
Spline
Terrain> Elevation
Data> Elevation
Region
Terrain> Elevation
Data> Terrain Break
Terrain> Modifier>
Raised Region
Terrain> Modifier>
Lowered Region
Terrain> Modifier>
Hill
Terrain> Modifier>
Valley
Terrain> Modifier>
Flat Region
Menu
Command
Tool Keyboard
Button Shortcut
Effect
Draw a line or series of lines to create a terrain
feature. See Terrain Feature Tools on page
496.
Terrain> Feature>
Feature Polyline
Terrain> Feature>
Feature Spline
Terrain> Feature>
Feature Closed Spline
Terrain> Feature>
Kidney Shaped
Feature
Terrain> Feature>
Terrain Hole
Terrain> Road>
Median
Terrain> Road>
Driveway
Menus &
Tools
Terrain> Feature>
Feature Line
39
Menu
Command
40
Tool Keyboard
Button Shortcut
Effect
Terrain> Road>
Sidewalk
Terrain> Road>
Sidewalk Polyline
Terrain> Plant>
Create Plant Image...
Terrain> Plant>
Grow all Plants...
Terrain> Plant>
Show Hardiness
Zones
Terrain> Sprinkler>
Sprinkler Head
Terrain> Sprinkler>
Sprinkler Line
Terrain> Sprinkler>
Sprinkler Spline
Terrain> Terrain
Library...
Library Menu
Tool Keyboard
Button Shortcut
Library> Library
Browser...
Ctrl + L
Effect
Open the Library Browser. See The Library
Browser on page 564.
Library> Library
Search...
Library> Refresh
Library Browser
Library>
Architectural Block
Library...
Library> Fixture
(Exterior) Library...
Library> Fixture
(Interior) Library...
Library> Furniture
(Exterior) Library...
Library> Furniture
(Interior) Library...
Library> Geometric
Shapes Library...
Library> Hardware
Library
Library> New>
Library
N/A
Library> New>
Folder
N/A
41
Menus &
Tools
Menu
Command
Library> New>
Material
N/A
Library> New>
Image
N/A
Library> Copy
Library List
N/A
Library> Delete
Object
N/A
Library> Rename
Object
N/A
Library>
Components
Library> Open...
42
N/A
Library> Search
Attributes...
N/A
3D Menu
Menu
Command
3D> Create Vector
View> Vector Full
Camera
Tool Keyboard
Button Shortcut
G
Menus &
Tools
Effect
Create a camera view of all floors. See
Vector View Tools on page 624.
Create a camera view of the current floor only.
See Camera Views on page 624.
Shift + G
43
44
Shift + K
3D> Remove 3D
3D> Render
Redraw a render view with the Final View settings in the Preferences dialog. See
Rendering Tools on page 650.
Shift + C
3D> Materials>
Create Material...
3D> Materials>
N/A
Convert Material
Definition (.dat) Files
3D> Materials>
Convert Textures to
Materials
3D> Materials>
Create Plan Materials
Library
3D> Materials>
Adjust Material
Definition
3D> Materials>
Material Painter...
3D> Materials>
Material
Eyedropper...
3D> Walkthroughs>
Play Walkthrough...
3D> Walkthroughs>
Record Walkthrough
45
Menus &
Tools
3D> Raytrace...
3D> Walkthroughs>
Stop Recording
3D> Walkthroughs>
Convert WLK File to
AVI...
3D> 3D Settings...
Ctrl + 1
CAD Menu
The CAD menu is used to access the CAD
tools. Most of these menu items are
accessible from the CAD toolbar.
Menu
Command
CAD> CAD Mode
On/Off
46
Tool Keyboard
Button Shortcut
F2
Description
Toggle between CAD and Architectural
modes. See The CAD Drawing Tools on
page 726.
Tool Keyboard
Button Shortcut
Description
47
Menus &
Tools
Menu
Command
Menu
Command
Tool Keyboard
Button Shortcut
48
Description
Shift + P
Description
CAD> Spline
CAD> Dimension>
Manual Dimension
CAD> Dimension>
End to End
Dimension
CAD> Dimension>
Angular Dimension
CAD> Dimension>
Interior Dimension
CAD> Dimension>
Point to Point
Dimension
CAD> Dimension>
Baseline Dimension
49
Menus &
Tools
Menu
Command
Menu
Command
Tool Keyboard
Button Shortcut
CAD> Dimension>
Auto Exterior
Dimensions
Shift + A
CAD> Dimension>
Display Temporary
Dimensions
50
Description
Automatically generate exterior dimensions as
defined in Dimension Defaults dialog.
See Auto Exterior Dimensions on page
685.
Enable the display of temporary dimensions
when CAD objects are selected. See
Display Temporary Dimensions on page
685.
Ctrl + A
CAD> Special:>
North Pointer
CAD> Autodetail
Tool Keyboard
Button Shortcut
V
Description
Insert a CAD block from the list of available
blocks in CAD Block Management dialog. See CAD Block Management on
page 754.
Click to open the CAD Block library. See
CAD Blocks on page 576.
Shift + V
Ctrl + F3
Shift + F8
F10
Ctrl + F9
Shift + F9
51
Menus &
Tools
Menu
Command
Menu
Command
52
Tool Keyboard
Button Shortcut
Description
Menu
Command
Tool Keyboard
Button Shortcut
Description
Tools Menu
Menu
Command
Tools> Display
Options...
Tool Keyboard
Button Shortcut
Tools> Layer
Painter...
Menus &
Tools
Effect
Open the Layer Display Options dialog to
control the display of items in 2D and 3D
views as well as the materials list. See Layer
Display Options Dialog on page 119.
Allows you to mmove objects to a layer by
clicking on them in any view. See Layer
Painter on page 124.
F8
Tools> Reference
Floors> Reference
Display
F9
Tools> Reference
Floors> Swap Floor/
Reference
53
Menu
Command
Effect
Tools> Reference
Floors> Change
Floor/Reference...
Tools> Reference
Floors> Up One Floor
Shift + N
Tools> Reference
Floors> Down One
Floor
Shift + M
Tools> Customize
Toolbars...
N/A
Tools> Layout>
Change Layout
Page...
54
Tool Keyboard
Button Shortcut
N/A
Tool Keyboard
Button Shortcut
Effect
Tools> Layout>
Layout Files...
N/A
Tools> Layout>
Rescale Layout
View...
Tools> Layout>
Relink File...
Tools> Symbol>
Create Symbol...
55
Menus &
Tools
Menu
Command
Menu
Command
56
Tool Keyboard
Button Shortcut
Effect
Tools> House
Wizard> Start House
Wizard...
Tools> House
N/A
Wizard> Build House
Tools> House
N/A
Wizard> Hide Room
Boxes
Tools> House
Wizard> Bathroom
Tools> House
Wizard> Bedroom
Tools> House
Wizard> Closet
Tools> House
Wizard> Deck
Tools> House
Wizard> Dining
Room
Tools> House
Wizard> Entry
Tools> House
Wizard> Family
Room
Tools> House
Wizard> Garage
Tools> House
Wizard> Hallway
Tool Keyboard
Button Shortcut
Effect
Tools> House
Wizard> Kitchen
Tools> House
Wizard> Laundry
Room
Tools> House
Wizard> Living
Room
Tools> House
Wizard> Master
Bedroom
Tools> House
Wizard> Office
Tools> House
Wizard> Porch
Tools> House
Wizard> Stair
Tools> House
Wizard> Stairwell
Tools> Plans
Database> Create
Plan Database...
Tools> Plans
Database> Edit Plan
Database...
Tools> Time
Tracker> Start Time
Logging
Tools> Time
Tracker> Stop Time
Logging
57
Menus &
Tools
Menu
Command
Menu
Command
Effect
Tools> Time
Tracker> View Time
Log...
Tools> Schedules>
Door...
Tools> Schedules>
Window...
Tools> Schedules>
Cabinet...
Tools> Schedules>
Fixture...
Tools> Schedules>
Furniture...
Tools> Schedules>
Electrical...
Tools> Materials
List> Calculate From
All Floors
Tools> Materials
List> Calculate From
Area
Tools> Materials
List> Calculate From
Room
Tools> Materials
List> Materials
Polyline
Tools> Materials
List> Master List
58
Tool Keyboard
Button Shortcut
Ctrl + M
Tool Keyboard
Button Shortcut
Effect
Tools> Materials
List>
Manufacturers...
Tools> Materials
List> Materials List
Management...
Tools> Project
Browser
Window Menu
The Window menu determines which
window is active and defines how it displays.
Menu
Command
Tool Keyboard
Button Shortcut
Effect
Window> Refresh
Display
F5
Window> Fill
Window
F6
Window> Swap
Views
F7
Window> Zoom
Shift + Z
Window> Zoom In
59
Menus &
Tools
Menu
Command
Menu
Command
Tool Keyboard
Button Shortcut
Window> Undo
Zoom
Window> Pan
Window
Window> Cascade
Shift + F5
Window> Tile
Horizontally
Window> Tile
Vertically
60
Effect
Shift + F6
Window> Arrange
Icons
Window> Next
Window
Window> Previous
Window
Window> Show
Layout
Tool Keyboard
Button Shortcut
Help> Index
Effect
Open the Online Help index and display an
outline of all the help information. See
Getting Help on page 16.
F1
N/A
Help> View
Reference Manual...
Help> View Quick
Start Guide...
Help> Download
Program Updates...
N/A
61
Menus &
Tools
Menu
Command
Menu
Command
Help> About Chief
Architect...
Tool Keyboard
Button Shortcut
N/A
Effect
Open the About dialog to view the registered
owners name, and the programs version
number and release date. Contact information
is displayed on the More Info tab.
62
63
Menus &
Tools
Toggle Buttons
Toggle buttons access a variety of functions.
Some control how your plan displays on
screen; while others are shortcuts to
preference settings that control how different
objects behave when edited.
64
65
Menus &
Tools
66
67
Menus &
Tools
68
69
70
Chapter 3:
File Management
Chapter Overview
Chapter Contents
File
Management
71
Preferences dialog.
to open the
72
to bring up
In the File name text box, enter a name for
the plan. Chief Architect will automatically
attach the extension .plan to plan files and
attach the extension .layout when a layout
file is saved.
73
File
Management
.
File> Save
should normally be used for
saving your work.
Any saved cross section/elevation views and
CAD Details associated with the 3D model
are also saved with this command.
When saving a layout, the program saves all
pages of the layout, all of the links to the
various views saved in the layout, and all of
the CAD added to the .layout file.
File> Save As
is used whenever an
identical copy of a plan or layout needs to be
created. This command can also be used to
transfer a file to a new location or store it.
File> Save As
will save any other files
needed for that specific model in the correct
directory with the new name. This is the best
way to create backups of your models.
Although the program will warn you if
you try to exit without saving, it is a
good idea to get in the habit of saving plan
files before exiting the program.
74
Auto Archive
Auto Archive
In the event that your computer shuts down
accidentally, you can recover your work by
opening the most recent auto save files.
Auto save files created as a result of an
improper shutdown are appended
_auto_save.plan or _auto_save.layout.
File
Management
75
Press
Ctrl
Manage Archives
button.
from the menu.
+ S on the keyboard.
Archive Files
Every time a model is saved, internal archive
files are automatically created that keep a
historical archive of your plan.
Previous
Save
Daily
Hourly
Archive folder illustrating
all three archive options
76
Undo Files
Undo Files
Chief Architect stores a set number of copies
of all open plan file changes, known as undo
files. Undo files are stored in the Undo
Directory, which can be specified on the
Directories panel of the Preferences
dialog. See Directories Panel on page 102.
By default, the undo directory is the
Windows Temporary Directory. When you
use Windows system cleanup features, these
files can be deleted. You should, therefore,
77
File
Management
Project Browser
The Project Browser is a convenient
interface that allows quick access to all
of the floors, cameras, elevations, CAD
Details, Wall Details, and Materials Lists
saved with the current plan. The Project
Browser is shared with the Library Browser
in the Plan Browser window. It can be
docked to the top, bottom, or sides of the
Chief Architect window or float freely.
1
2
3
4
5
6
Plan Browser in a floating state (not docked)
78
Template Plans
79
File
Management
Template Plans
Plan
or File> New Layout
is
selected. The only difference is that you will
be using the specified template plan for all of
the settings and default values instead of
your default template plan.
Note: Make sure that when you create a template plan, you use the appropriate units. The
units used in the new plan will be the same as
when the file was saved.
2.
3.
4.
After modifying all of your default settings, select File> Save As...
to save
your changes under a new name.
5.
6.
Go to the Edit> Preferences> General> New Plans panel and click the
Browse button.
2.
Updating Templates
When you make a change to the settings
within a plan file, the template plan is not
affected. To change the default settings in
your template, you must open the template
file, make the change and choose File> Save
. Another option is to select File> Save
As...
in the current plan file and save it in
the Templates directory as a new template.
You may want to delete any drawings to
prevent them from becoming part of the
template.
80
1
2
3
Database
to create a new plan database
file that can be used to search for plans using
81
File
Management
1
7
9
11
6
8
13
10
12
14
2
3
5
82
83
File
Management
Exporting a Plan
One of the simplest ways to transfer a model
to another directory or another machine is to
use the Save As
84
85
File
Management
86
Chapter 4:
Defaults &
Preferences
Chapter Overview
Chapter Contents
Default Settings
Dynamic Defaults
Plan Defaults
Reset to Defaults
Preferences Dialog
Appearance Panel
Colors Panel
Font Panel
Library Browser Panel
Text and Page Setup Panel
General Panel
Directories Panel
New Plans Panel
Layers Panel
Unit Conversions Panel
Architectural Panel
CAD Panel
Line Properties Panel
Snap Properties Panel
Special CAD Panel
Time Tracker Panel
Material List Panel
Report Style Panel
Master List Panel
Categories Panel
Render Panel
Texture Filter Panel
Reset Options Panel
Defaults &
Preferences
87
Default Settings
Defaults play an important role in Chief
Architects design process. When prepared
and used properly, defaults can save a lot of
time. It is a good idea to become familiar
with the default settings for the many objects
that can be used in a plan.
Default Settings can be accessed by
selecting Edit> Default Settings....
Dimension Defaults
Select Dimension and click the Edit button;
or double-click the Dimension Tools
parent button to display the Dimension
Defaults dialog. See Dimension Fonts on
page 682.
Door Defaults
Select Interior Door or Exterior Door or
double-click the Door Tools
parent button to open the Door Defaults dialog. See
Door Defaults on page 229.
Dormer Defaults
Select Dormer and click the Edit button; or
double-click the Auto Floating Dormer
or the Auto Dormer
child button to open
the Dormer Defaults dialog. See Dormer
Defaults on page 334.
Electrical Defaults
Cabinet Defaults
Select Cabinets and click the Edit button; or
double-click the Cabinet Tools
parent
button to access the defaults dialogs for the
different cabinet types. See Cabinet
Defaults on page 458.
Camera Defaults
88
Floor Defaults
Select Floor and click the Edit button;
parent but-
Default Settings
Foundation Defaults
Select Foundation and click the Edit button
or click the Build Foundation
child
button to open the Build Foundation
dialog. See Foundation Defaults on page
273.
Framing Defaults
Select Framing and click the Edit button; or
double-click the Framing Tools
parent
button to open the Framing Defaults
dialog. See Framing Defaults on page 377.
Plan Defaults
Select Plan and click the Edit button; or
double-click the Select Objects
button
to open the Plan Defaults dialog. See
Plan Defaults on page 91.
Schedule Defaults
Select Schedules to choose from the
schedule default dialogs for various objects.
See Schedule Defaults on page 927.
89
Defaults &
Preferences
Material Defaults
Window Defaults
Select Window and click the Edit... button;
Reset Defaults
Edit> Preferences
Select Edit> Preferences... or click the
Preferences
Dynamic Defaults
Dynamic defaults are values that can be set
or changed globally throughout a model and
are found in the default specification dialogs
of most objects, including walls, doors,
cabinets and rooms.
90
Plan Defaults
Defaults &
Preferences
Plan Defaults
Plan defaults control basic features of the
Chief Architect environment. To open the
Plan Defaults dialog, select Edit> Default
Settings...
; select Plan Defaults; and
click the Edit... button; or, double-click the
Select Objects
button.
91
92
Reset to Defaults
Reset to Defaults
the roof to be built over this room, and others
in its same roof group, independently from
the roof built over other parts of the plan.
Check to reset to the default roof group, zero.
2
3
5
If your plan behaves strangely, the current settings may have been inherited
and no longer appropriate. An easy way to
check for this is to open your plan and reset
these items to their defaults. Rebuild floors
and ceilings to see if the plan looks better. If
so, you know what the problem is. Rather
than save your plan at this point and lose all
these settings, you may want to investigate
and find the specific settings causing the
problem and fix only those.
93
Defaults &
Preferences
Preferences Dialog
In the Preferences dialog, you can
define global setting which apply
across the Chief Architect application rather
than to one specific plan. Select Edit>
Preferences
Appearance Panel
4
1 Contextual Menus allow you to access
a pop-up menu when you right-click in
94
Appearance Panel
95
Defaults &
Preferences
Colors Panel
2
3
4
5
96
Font Panel
Font Panel
2
3
Defaults &
Preferences
Chief Architect.
97
Legacy Text and Dimension Conversion settings only affect plans from
previous versions when they are
opened in Version 10. You should set these
values to your default font that you used in
previous versions before you open your legacy plans.
1
2
3
4
98
Defaults &
Preferences
1
2
3
4
1 Room Label Initial Size - Specify the
initial size for room labels. Changing
99
General Panel
4
5
100
General Panel
101
Defaults &
Preferences
Directories Panel
Chief Architect stores many support files in
directories. The default locations of these
directories are listed and, if necessary, can be
redefined in the Directories panel.
Default locations need not be changed under
normal circumstances. It is, however,
sometimes preferable to locate certain files in
another location. To define a new default
102
Graphics Directories
Graphics are stored in three locations: the
Images, Textures, and Backdrops
directories.
Defaults &
Preferences
103
Layers Panel
104
1
2
Defaults &
Preferences
105
1
3
Example
106
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Hit OK.
Architectural Panel
Architectural Panel
1
2
3
107
Defaults &
Preferences
CAD Panel
The CAD panel contains settings which lay
the foundation for everything done in CAD
mode. These are not global settings: they are
unique to each drawing file.
108
Defaults &
Preferences
109
button to
110
2
3
111
Defaults &
Preferences
2
3
4
112
Categories Panel
Categories Panel
The Categories panel allows you to expand
the scope of the Materials List by specifying
additional information under each of the
main Materials List headings.
2
4
Defaults &
Preferences
113
Components
edit button. Only objects
with a related Components dialog can use
this material subcategory capability. Any
object that can be used in a schedule can also
use this formula in the schedule.
Render Panel
2
4
6
3
5
114
Render Panel
115
Defaults &
Preferences
116
117
Defaults &
Preferences
118
Chapter 5:
Layers
Chapter Overview
Chapter Contents
119
Layers
4
1
3
5
6
7
Every object exists on a layer. You can
determine which layer an object is currently
located on by opening it for specification.
The Layer Display Options dialog
controls the display of objects by layer. It
consists of a table that displays all available
layers and the attributes for each. Layers can
be added and deleted; there is no limit to the
number of layers that can exist in a plan.
120
Layers
2 Layers are grouped alphabetically with
Layer Properties
3 When a layer or layers is selected,
Layer Sets
4 Layer Sets are used to define and save
121
Layers
Dialog Buttons
6 Click Select All to select all layers.
122
Layer Tab
Layer Tab
1
3
Layers
123
selected.
Layer Painter
The Layer Painter tool allows you to
move an object to any layer from any
view.
124
Displaying Objects
Displaying Objects
The display of layers in 2D views, 3D views,
and materials lists is centrally controlled in
the Layer Display Options dialog. See
Layer Display Options Dialog on page
119.
Note: Not all layers contain objects that display in all views. For instance, door sizes
need not display in 3D views and room labels
need not display in materials lists. However,
because any object can be put on any layer,
the display controls for these layers remain
functional.
3D Views
All layers with a "3D" indicator in the 3D
column will display in 3D views. The
surfaces of objects residing on layers that are
not turned on for 3D display will not be
calculated. 3D views will automatically
update to reflect changes made to layers.
Materials Lists
Layers
125
Reference Floor
An "R" in the Ref. column indicates that the
layer displays with the Reference Floor.
Locking Layers
Objects in layers with a lock symbol in the
Lock column will display but cannot be
selected. This prevents them from being
accidentally changed.
126
When in CAD
mode, CAD objects
drawn are placed on the Current CAD
Layer, unless a default layer has already
been assigned by the program to that type of
object.
Layer Sets
Layer Sets
Layer Sets can be used to define specific
layer settings for different views. Each plan
file can have an unlimited number of layer
sets. Each plan always has one layer set
called Default Set. The Default Set cannot
be deleted.
You can add, delete and choose the active
layer set from the Layer Display Options
dialog. To make a different layer set active,
choose the desired layer set from the drop
down list.
Layers
to open
127
File dialog.
128
selected color.
Chapter 6:
Walls, Railings,
& Fencing
Chapter Overview
Chapter Contents
Default Settings
The Wall Tools
The Curved Wall Tools
Exterior and Interior Walls
Foundation Walls
Pony Walls
Invisible Walls
Railings
Deck Railings
Fencing
Hatch Wall
Break Wall
Walls
129
Drawing Walls
Drawing Curved Walls
Displaying Walls
Selecting Walls
Deleting Walls
Copying Walls
Moving Walls
Moving Walls Using Dimensions
Resizing Walls
Editing Walls
Editing Curved Walls
Editing Walls in Elevation Views
Connecting Walls
Aligning Walls
CAD to Walls
Wall Type Definitions
Wall Type Definitions Dialog
Exporting Wall Definitions
Importing Wall Definitions
Curved Walls and Roofs
Special Walls
The Wall Specification Dialog
Wall Hatch Specification Dialog
Wall/Railing/Fencing Defaults Setup
Default Settings
Default Settings can be accessed by
selecting Edit> Default Settings.
Wall Defaults
The settings in the various wall defaults
dialogs determine what kind of a wall is
drawn when the different wall tools are used.
It is a good idea to be familiar with these
settings and how they relate to your style of
building.
Double-click the Wall Tools
button; the Exterior Wall
parent
button; or the
Interior Wall
button to open the Wall
Defaults dialog and specify which wall
type will be drawn when using the Interior
and Exterior Wall tools. See Wall/Railing/
Fencing Defaults Setup on page 181.
130
or Retaining
Wall
tool is used; the size of the
footings; and other information used when
building foundations. See Foundation
Defaults on page 273.
Foundation and
Retaining Wall Defaults
Retaining Wall
or
tool.
Railing
tool. See Wall/Railing/Fencing
Defaults Setup on page 181.
Double-click the Fencing
tool to open
the Fencing Defaults dialog which allows
you to specify what type of fencing is drawn
when using the Fencing
tool. See
Fencing Defaults Dialog on page 183.
Exterior and
Interior Walls
The Exterior Wall tool draws walls
using the wall type specified for
exterior walls. The exterior wall type is
defined in the Wall Defaults dialog.
The Interior Wall tool draws walls
using the wall type specified for
interior walls. The interior wall type is
defined in the Wall Defaults dialog.
Whether the wall is an actual exterior or
interior wall will be determined by the
program based on the model and not by
which tool is used to draw the wall. See
Exterior and Interior Walls on page 133.
Foundation Walls
The Foundation Wall tool draws
foundation walls according to the
information specified in the
Foundation Defaults dialog. Foundation
walls normally have a footing and can be
drawn on any floor of the model, not just the
foundation floor. See Foundation Walls on
page 133.
Pony Walls
A Pony Wall, or sometimes called a
split wall, is defined as a wall with two
separate wall types, one for the upper
portion and another for the lower portion.
The Pony Wall tool draws pony walls using
the information specified in the Pony Wall
Defaults dialog. You can also convert a
normal wall into a pony wall and vice versa
from within the Wall Specification
dialog. See Pony Walls on page 134.
Invisible Walls
Invisible walls are walls used to define
separate areas within a plan. They can
display in floor plan view, but they will not
131
Walls
Railings
Hatch Wall
Deck Railings
The Deck Railing tool draws decks,
complete with framing and bounded by
a railing. If a foundation level exists,
supports for the deck are also created. See
Deck Railings on page 137.
Fencing
The Fencing tool draws fences.
Fencing is similar to railings but it is
normally used outside of a building and will
follow the shape of the terrain. By default
fencing will not define room areas. See
Fencing on page 138.
Retaining Wall
The Retaining Wall tool functions
similarly to terrain breaks, but includes
a retaining wall. See Terrain Breaks on
page 494.
Editing the walls elevation in a Cross
Section/Elevation
132
Break Wall
The Break Wall tool applies a break in
a wall. Once a wall is broken, the two
wall segments are separate walls that can be
modifed independent of each other. See
Break Wall on page 139.
tool,
tool, the
tool, the
tool, the
Wall
tool, and the Hatch Wall
tool
are all similar to their corresponding Wall
Tools
child buttons. See The Wall
Tools on page 131.
For information about drawing curved walls,
see Drawing Curved Walls on page 141.
For information about editing curved walls,
see Editing Curved Walls on page 148.
Specification dialog.
Foundation Walls
tool.
133
Walls
Pony Walls
A Pony Wall, sometimes called a split
wall, is defined as a wall with two
separate wall types for the upper and lower
portions.
134
Invisible Walls
2.
3.
Invisible Walls
Invisible walls are used to create or
modify room definitions. See Room
Definition on page 189.
Object
edit button, and clearing the
Invisible check box on the General tab of the
Wall Specification dialog. See General
Tab on page 166.
Walls
135
Important Notes on
Invisible Walls
Floor, wall and ceiling areas are calculated separately for rooms divided by
invisible as well as normal walls.
Railings
Railings are created and edited just like
walls in floor plan view. By default,
they display like walls; however, the display
of newels and balusters can be turned on. See
Newels/Balusters Tab on page 177.
The default type for new railings is defined
in the Railing Defaults dialog. See
Railing Defaults Dialog on page 183.
If Panels is selected on the Railing tab, you
can choose a Panel Type on the Newels/
Balusters tab. See Newels/Balusters Tab
on page 177.
136
Deck Railings
Deck Railings
Deck Railing is used on the exterior of
a house to create decks. Click and drag
tool or the
tool to draw deck
Walls
137
Fencing
Fencing in Chief Architect works much
like railings. Create and modify a fence
just as you would a railing or a wall. Railing
are normally used to define decks or to
divide rooms within a structure when there is
a difference in floor height. Fences, on the
other hand, do not create room definition and
are normally used outside of a structure to
divide the terrain or detail an exterior.
Fences and rails have separate default
settings so that you can use a style of fencing
other than the style you would normally use
for railings.
Hatch Wall
The Hatch Wall tool will fill any wall
segment, except invisible walls, with a
single hatch pattern. The Hatch Wall
tool superimposes a hatch pattern across all
layers of the selected wall. It will cover up
any hatch pattern previously specified for the
given wall type.
The wall hatch pattern can be specified in the
Wall Specification dialog. See Wall
Hatch Specification Dialog on page 180.
In general, it is preferable to use the wall
type definition to control the display of a
wall rather then to use the Hatch Wall
tool. Wall hatching can be assigned to a
particular layer of the wall type within the
Wall Type Definitions dialog. This
allows greater control of the pattern and you
can use multiple hatch patterns in a single
138
Delete
edit button or pressing the Del
key. Make sure you have selected the hatch
pattern and not the wall by noting that "Wall
Hatching" is displayed in the status bar. This
Break Wall
Break
tool to separate the wall into two
or more segments. When the Hatch Wall
tool is applied to a broken wall, the
pattern will only be applied to the selected
segment.
Break Wall
A wall can be broken into two
segments by selecting the Break Wall
tool and clicking on the wall. This will
place a break in the wall, creating two wall
the
Esc
of Break Wall
mode and check the
break by selecting the original wall. If the
handles stop near the break, the wall was
correctly broken.
Draw exterior walls in a clockwise direction. Walls have an exterior side and an
interior side. Drawing in a clockwise
direction will assure that the exterior side
faces out.
139
Walls
Drawing Walls
House Wizard
The House Wizard allows you to place and
arrange room "objects" that can then be
converted into a fully editable house plan.
See House Wizard on page 810.
Wall Positioning
If Use Snap Grid/Units is checked in the
Plan Defaults dialog, a new wall will snap
to grid lines and line intersections as it is
drawn. Wall ends snap according to the wall
layer specified on the General tab of the
Wall Specification dialog.
Use Angle Snaps
to draw walls at
specific angles. Modify the angle of an
existing wall by specifying a new angle in
the Wall Specification dialog or by
dragging an end to a new angle.
Select a wall tools. Click and drag the pointer
to draw a wall. Note the temporary wall
showing the position and length of the wall.
The length and the angle of the temporary
wall display in the status bar at the bottom of
the window.
Drag the end of the temporary wall in a
circular motion. In the status bar, note that
the wall jumps at defined angle increments.
Release the mouse button to draw the wall at
140
Plan Defaults
Chord
If Angle Snaps
is enabled, the angle of
the chord of a curved wall is limited to the
allowed angles as set in the Plan Defaults
dialog. Choose 7 1/2 degree allowed angles
for the most control and least jumpiness of
curved walls.
Center
A curved wall always has a center point. The
center displays as a small cross when you
select the Show Arc Centers check box on
the Line Properties panel of the
141
Walls
Arc Centers
toggle button.
Radius
The radius of a curved wall is measured from
the center to one surface or layer of the wall.
The radius can be defined on the General tab
of the Wall Specification dialog. You
may elect to define the radius to the exterior
or interior wall layers. Temporarily change
the color of the exterior wall edge to make
this distinction easier to see. See General
Tab on page 166.
Displaying Walls
In Floor Plan View
In 3D Views
142
Selecting Walls
Selecting Walls
Click on a wall , railing, or fencing to select
it using the Select Objects
tool; any of
the wall tools; or by right-clicking on it
using any other tool in Architectural mode.
The selected wall will have five edit handles,
one at each end, one where selected, and one
slightly away from each end. Drag from any
of these handles to dynamically edit the wall.
Multiple Select In
Floor Plan View
Select the first wall using any method, then
hold down the Shift key and click on
additional walsl to add them to the selection
In Section/Elevation Views
Click on a wall in a cross section/elevation
view using the Select Objects
tool when
the Architectural mode is active. Edit
handles allowing you to modify the wall will
display. Use the tools on the edit toolbar to
create a raked wall; pony wall; or stepped
wall. See Raked Walls on page 165.
Deleting Walls
Select a wall, railing, or fence, then click the
Delete
edit button or the
key on the
keyboard. Another way to delete a wall or
railing is to draw a different wall type across
Del
Copying Walls
The standard cut, copy, and paste functions
cannot be used on wall objects. The best way
to make a copy of any walls is to use the Edit
Walls
Area
tools. See Edit Area Tools on
page 816.
143
Moving Walls
Extend
Extend
Wall offset
Move
Wall offset
Straight Walls
The Move handle displays between the two
offset handles, close to where you clicked to
select the wall. Drag the Move handle
perpendicular to the wall and release it when
the wall is near its proper location. As you
move the wall, temporary dimensions
display that update with the move.
Curved Walls
When a curved wall is selected, one of the
edit handles that displays is centered on the
chord. This is equivalent to the move handle
for a straight wall.
144
is
Moving Walls
Straight/Curved
Wall Combinations
If you move a straight wall connected to a
normal curved wall, the normal curved wall
would extend or contract along its chord. For
a normal curved wall, moving the straight
wall to the right simply expands the curved
wall, which remains a half circle.
Locked Center
Combination
Locked
Center
Arc
145
Walls
3.
146
1.
2.
4.
Resizing Walls
Resizing Walls
The two end handles of a selected wall are
called extend handles and can be used to
extend the wall in the same direction; rotate
the wall at allowed angles; or create a new
wall of the same type.
Select a wall and drag an extend handle in
line with the wall to shorten or lengthen it. If
the wall is shortened to less than the
Unconnected Wall Min. Length set in the
Wall Defaults dialog, it will be deleted. A
walls length can also be defined in the walls
Wall Specification dialog.
You can also use the extend edit handle to
rotate the selected wall or to create a new
wall of the same type. See Wall Edit
Preferences on page 140.
Editing Walls
Wall Heights
147
Walls
Settings
; select Floor and click the
Edit... button to open the Floor Defaults
dialog for the current floor and make the
Unlocked Centers
An unlocked center is the default for curved
walls and is what is meant by a normal
curved wall. When a normal curved wall or
the walls adjacent to it are moved, its chord
expands or contracts the way a straight wall
would. The angle of its chord and the
subtended angle remain constant, while the
radius and center change. Exceptions to this
rule occur when a wall is dragged from its
end handle; curvature handle; or center point
handle as described below.
If you want the angle of the curved wall to
remain tangent to or consistent with the walls
it meets, leave the center unlocked. Most
often, you will use curved walls with
unlocked centers and wait until the floor plan
is complete to lock the centers.
Locked Centers
A locked-center wall expands and contracts
along its arc but maintains the same location
for its center. When this is not possible, its
radius changes while its center remains
locked in the same place. An exception to
this occurs when a selected wall is dragged
148
Center
Move
Extend
Wall
Offset
Curvature
Walls
149
150
Cross Section
view tool. This tool can
isolate the wall that you want to edit;
whereas a cross section which is not back
clipped will generate everything from the
camera position through the building,
making it difficult to select the proper wall
for editing.
151
Walls
edit button.
Connecting Walls
Draw a wall sufficiently close to an existing
wall and the program will join them together.
The new wall will move, extend, or contract
slightly to meet the existing wall. Walls join
at the intersection of their main layers. Walls
will automatically join when their centers are
152
Aligning Walls
Fix Connections
Occasionally, one or more walls do not
properly connect. To clean up most
connections throughout the plan, select
Build> Walls> Fix Connections
. If you
have only one connection to fix, the Connect
Walls
Connect Walls
Use the Connect Walls button to
complete an intersection of two walls.
Select either wall and click the
Connect Walls
edit button. If the
unconnected wall ends are sufficiently close
to one another, the program will connect
them. If the separation is too great, extend
one towards the other and try again if
needed.
The Connect Walls
edit button works
for curved walls just as it does for straight
walls. It extends the ends of the selected wall
and a nearby adjacent wall so that they meet.
A normal curved wall will extend to the
meeting point along its chord; while a locked
Aligning Walls
The Wall Offset handles are used for fine
adjustment of walls. See Moving Walls on
page 144. When you move a wall with these
handles, the program does not snap the wall
to adjacent walls or objects as it will using
other edit handles.
Walls
153
154
CAD to Walls
CAD to Walls
CAD to Walls
allows CAD lines to be
converted to Chief Architect objects. This is
helpful when importing drawings into floor
plan view. Two or more parallel CAD lines
can be converted to both straight or curved
walls or rails. CAD lines representing
windows and doors can also be converted.
All lines that you want to convert to walls
must be located on one layer. The same is
true for windows, doors, and rails. It is
helpful to place like items on a single layer
to display
155
Walls
156
1
2
8
9
10
4
11
12
6
157
Walls
158
Walls
159
3
4
5
Wall type definitions can be exported from
one plan file into another Chief Architect
plan file. This is a convenient alternative to
re-creating a wall types that may already
exist in another plan.
The wall type definitions that will export
from your current plan are listed in the Wall
Type Definitions dialog. See Wall/
Railing/Fencing Defaults Setup on page
181.
The File> Export> Wall Definitions...
option exports all wall type definitions in one
.dat file. This .dat file can then be read into
another Chief Architect plan file.
list.
160
2
3
To import a .dat file (wall type definitions)
into the current plan, choose File> Import>
Wall Definitions.... The Import Wall
Definitions File dialog will open.
Walls
161
162
2.
Special Walls
Special Walls
Stepped Walls & Footings
One application for pony walls is a stepped
foundation. The lower part of the pony wall
is the concrete wall with footing, and the
upper part of the pony wall is a framed wall
built to the first floor platform.
In the illustration below, the lower pony wall
is a single layer concrete wall and the upper
part of the pony wall is faced with brick.
Decks
An exterior deck is produced by enclosing an
exterior area using Railings
or Deck
Railings
just as you would draw a room.
"Rooms" created using Deck Railing are
automatically assigned the room type of
Deck. Select and open a "room" created
using regular Railings to access its Room
Specification dialog and select the Deck
room type. See Decks on page 189.
The Break Wall
tool makes it easy to
create stepped walls and stepped footings.
To add a step to a wall, select the wall in
cross section/elevation view.
2.
3.
4.
5.
163
Walls
1.
Interior Stairwells
3.
4.
Object
edit button.
5.
Nooks
The illustration below shows how a kitchen
nook can be extended out from the rest of the
house using the Break Wall
tool.
164
Special Walls
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.
3.
tool and
5.
6.
7.
Move these short walls using dimensions to accurately size the nook.
Raked Walls
Raked walls can be created from any wall
selected in a cross section/elevation view.
165
Walls
edit button.
General Tab
1
3
4
5
9
Options on this tab appear only when they
apply to the selected wall or walls. The
dialog will not display all of the options at
once.
166
Ceilings
167
Walls
168
Walls
169
Roof Tab
4
3
170
Foundation Tab
1
2
3
171
Walls
1
2
172
1
2
3
4
173
Walls
Railing Tab
1
2
6
7
3
8
4
5
or Deck Railing
tools.
174
Walls
175
176
Newels/Balusters Tab
1
3
5
7
2
4
6
8
height.
177
Walls
1
2
3
178
3
4
Walls
179
Layer Tab
Materials Tab
Layer Tab
For information about the Layer tab, see
Layer Tab on page 123.
edit button.
180
Use Layer Color - Select the radio button to make the hatch pattern line color
that of the Walls, Hatching layer.
Note: Hatching and fills in walls are not written to DXF/DWG files. They are one of the
few items displayed in a floor plan view that
cannot be exported in a DXF file.
Settings...
page 88.
4
2
3
181
Walls
5
4
182
button.
Walls
183
184
Rooms
Chapter Overview
When walls or railings create an enclosed
area, "room definition" has been established.
Rooms defined in this manner can be
selected just like other objects in Chief
Architect and opened for specification.
Every room should be assigned a Room
Type. With a specified Room Type comes
predefined characteristics. A room defined as
Porch, for example, assumes certain
attributes which are different than if it were a
Kitchen.
When a room is opened for specification:
The Room Type can be specified, controlling the default behavior for the room
as well as the room label which can
appear in floor plan views.
Chapter Contents
Room Defaults
Room Material Defaults
Floor and Ceiling Materials
Wall Materials
Floor & Ceiling Heights
Room Definition
Decks
Selecting a Room
Room Specification
Displaying Room Labels
Special Ceilings
Room Polylines
Select Same and Load Same for Rooms
Room Specification Dialog
Floor Defaults Setup
185
Rooms
Chapter 7:
Room Defaults
Default Settings can be accessed by
selecting Edit> Default Settings from
the menu.
Room default values can be specified in the
General Rooms
Decks
186
Wall Materials
There are several ways that walls can have
their materials assigned to them, depending
on how the rooms and walls have been
defined:
187
Rooms
Wall Materials
(Foundation floor ht = first floor ht - platform thickness - stem wall height + slab
thickness).
negative number.)
H = Ceiling Height, foundation
188
2.
3.
Room Definition
A room is a totally enclosed area defined by
any combination of joined walls or railings,
both visible or invisible. A room must have
an unbroken perimeter to be recognized as a
room by Chief Architect.
Unless otherwise specified, rooms
automatically generate floor and ceiling
platforms. Rooms are also automatically
Decks
A room can be specified as a Deck on the
General Tab of the Room Specification
dialog.
189
Rooms
Room Definition
button on the
190
Deck Framing
There are two ways deck rooms can be
framed in Chief Architect, Standard deck
framing or Advanced Deck Framing. When a
deck room is selected, one of two edit
buttons will appear, either the Build
Advanced Deck Framing
edit button or
Selecting a Room
Room definition is established when a room
is completely enclosed by walls. You can
confirm that room definition has been
established by using Select Objects
to
select it in floor plan view. When a fullyenclosed room is selected, the room will
highlight.
The exterior of a house can also be selected,
allowing the buildings exterior to be
controlled using the Room Specification
dialog. Click near an exterior wall using the
Select Objects
room.
Room Specification
A room can be opened for specification by
selecting it in floor plan view or floor
overview and clicking the Open Object
edit button. You can also double-click a room
using Select Objects
to open the Room
Specification dialog for that room.
191
Rooms
Selecting a Room
Room Types
Interior - Living, Dining, Family, Kitchen,
Nook, Bath, Master Bath, Master Bedrm,
Bedroom, Study, Office, Entry, Hall, Closet,
Dressing, Storage, Laundry, and Utility
Exterior - Court, Deck, Balcony
Hybrid - Open Below, Garage, Slab, Porch,
Attic
192
Plan Check
uses the room type and
its characteristics for basic plan checking.
Threshold Lines
A wall between exterior rooms and interior
rooms can contain windows. Doors in
exterior walls and doors that open to exterior
type rooms (such as a garage, porch, deck,
etc.) have a threshold line across the opening
in floor plan view. If there is a problem with
the threshold line, make sure the rooms are
labeled properly and that all walls are
correctly joined. Once the problem is solved,
force the doors to recalculate for thresholds
by selecting the door and simply clicking
once on the middle handle.
Threshold
Line
Foundations and
Room Specification
Once a room is defined, the program makes
assumptions about the foundation below.
Walls that define the garage have a foundation under them defined by the
Foundation Defaults dialog with a
concrete slab at the top of stem wall or
grade beam.
193
Rooms
Room Sizes
Any defined room can have its size displayed
with the Room Label in one of three ways.
Room standard area - Measured from the
outside surface of exterior walls and the
center of interior walls. It does not include
area within bay, box and bow windows. This
is rounded to the nearest square foot or mm.
Room interior area - Measured from the
inner surfaces of all the room's walls. This is
rounded to the nearest square foot or mm.
Room interior dimensions - Measured
again from the inner surfaces of the room's
walls. This does include the area within Bay,
Box, or Bow windows if these windows
reach the floor. This is rounded to the nearest
inch or mm.
Floor areas can be measured to the exterior
main layer surface or to the surface of the
194
Living Area
The Living Area label appears near the
center at the bottom of the plan the first time
you Build Walls/Floors/Ceilings with at
least one room. This value is recalculated
every time you Rebuild Walls/Floors/Ceilings
Rooms
2.
3.
4.
195
Special Ceilings
Lowered Ceiling Height
196
Special Ceilings
3.
Ceiling Plane
; create ceiling planes;
then select and open them to assign a
pitch
1.
2.
child button or
Coffered Ceilings
A coffered ceiling is usually based on a hipstyle roof. If a hip roof is used and the Ceiling over this room is unselected, the new
ceiling follows the entire hip roof line. Click
the Rebuild Walls/Floors/Ceilings
child
button or F12 if the ceiling does not rebuild
automatically.
197
Rooms
Cathedral Ceilings
Split Levels
Split Levels are created by adjusting the
floors and ceiling heights of various areas of
the plan. Rooms can be either raised or
lowered. In the example below, the lowest
floor height is 0; the next is 24; and the next
is 48 inches. The ceiling height in each room
is set to 96 inches. The overview and cross
section/elevation view are shown.
198
Example
A close look at the front entry of this splitentry home shows that part of the upper floor
was lowered to provide the entry platform.
Note that the siding on the second floor
follows the dropped floor height.
As you walk into the house, the floor level of the Entry is
halfway between the two floors. The floor height is set to
54" (which is 54 1/4 lower than the rest of the rooms on
this floor). The ceiling height has also been raised so that it
is higher than the rest of this floor. If the ceiling remained
defaulted it would stay at the same height, which would be
at 96" (the floor default) plus 54 1/4 (the amount the floor
was dropped) for a total of 150 1/4.
Room Polylines
Select any interior or exterior room in
floor plan view and the Make Room
Polyline
199
Rooms
Room Polylines
200
1
3
5
2
4
Rooms
edit button.
201
General Tab
1
11
2
3
5
7
4
6
8
9
10
202
Moldings Tab
203
Rooms
204
Rooms
Structure Tab
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
205
206
tool is used.
Materials Tab
For more information about the Materials
tab, see Materials Tab on page 603.
Rooms
3
4
5
7
207
Molding Tab
3
4
5
1 Crown Molding, Chair Rail and Base
208
Chapter 8:
Doors
Doors
Chapter Overview
Chief Architect comes with a wide variety of
interior and exterior doors. In addition, the
library offers a full line of specialty doors
and doorways including manufacturerspecific products.
Once doors have been placed in the model, a
door schedule can be automatically
generated. See Creating Schedules on page
928.
Chapter Contents
Door Defaults
The Door Tools
Displaying Doors
Selecting Doors
Deleting Doors
Copying Doors
Moving Doors
Changing Door Swings
Resizing Doors
Special Doors
Door Specification Dialog
Door Defaults
Door Defaults
Default Settings can be accessed by
selecting Edit> Default Settings from
the menu.
There are door defaults for both interior and
exterior doors. It is most efficient to go over
these settings before doors are placed to
209
Hinged Doors
Click the Hinged Door child button
and click on a wall in floor plan view
where you would like to place a hinged door.
Hinged doors can be placed on interior or
exterior walls. A hinged door will become a
double door when its width is four feet or
greater.
Doorways
Click the Doorway child button and
click on a wall in floor plan view to
place a doorway (without a door) into which
210
Sliding Doors
Click the Sliding Door child button
and click on a wall in floor plan view
where you would like to place a sliding door.
Sliding doors can be placed on interior or
exterior walls. If placed on an exterior wall,
the dimensions will be 5-0 x 6-8 with a
12" bottom frame and a 6" frame on the sides
and top. If placed on an interior wall, the
dimensions will be a solid 5-0 x 6-8 with
two movable panels. A sliding door must be
at least four feet wide.
Pocket Doors
Click the Pocket Door child button
and click on a wall in floor plan view
where you would like to place a pocket door.
The default pocket door dimensions are 2-6
x 6-8 high. A pocket door will become a
double pocket door if its width is four feet or
greater.
Bifold Doors
Click the Bifold Door child button and
click on a wall in floor plan view where
you would like to place a bifold door.
The default interior single bifold door is 26 x 6-8. A bifold door will become a
double bifold door if its width is greater than
three feet.
Bifold doors always display closed in any 3D
view.
Displaying Doors
2.
3.
Navigate through the Doors library category until you find the custom door style
desired.
4.
5.
Displaying Doors
Once placed, doors are visible in all views.
211
Doors
Garage Doors
In 3D Views
Click the Display Options
button within
any 3D view to open the Layer Display
Options dialog. This dialog allows objects
to be turned on and off by layer. See Layer
Display Options Dialog on page 119.
Selecting Doors
Before a door can be edited, it must first be
selected. Once selected, three edit handles
will display which can be used to move,
resize, delete, or change the swing of the
door. In addition, the Edit toolbar will
display, making additional tools available for
modifying the selected door.
Click on the door while any door or window tool is active. Walls or other objects
which might interfere with selection will
be ignored.
2.
4.
Deleting Doors
Select a door or group of doors to be deleted.
Once selected, press the Del key on the
212
edit button
Copying Doors
Single/Multiple Doors
One or more doors can be copied from one
location to another, either within the same
plan or across plans. If multiple doors are to
be copied simultaneously, they must be
copied from the same, unbroken wall to
another unbroken wall.
To copy a door(s), first select one or more
doors. Once selected, click the Copy/Paste
edit button. If you are copying the door(s)
to the same floor of the same plan, click on
the wall to place a copy.
If you are copying the door(s) to a different
floor of the same plan or to a different plan,
go to the new floor or new plan and select
Edit> Paste from the menu which will make
the pointer resemble the picture on the Copy/
Paste edit button. Click on a wall to place
a copy of the selected door(s).
Stacked/Blocked Doors
Stacked door combinations, such as those
created with a door, a transom window, and a
couple of side lights, may be copied as a
group. Since there is a window above the
door, both occupy the same location in floor
plan view, making it impossible to group
select them in that view.
Stacked windows and doors can also be
copied by blocking them first, which is best
done in a cross section/elevation view, see
Blocked Units on page 235. The blocked
unit can then be copied in floor plan view.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Multiple Copies
To make multiple copies of the same
object(s), select the object(s) and doubleclick the Copy/Paste
pasting.
213
Doors
Copying Doors
Moving Doors
A single opening, a single door, or a group of
doors and openings can be moved by either
dragging from the center handle or by editing
the dimension value.
Dragging
The easiest way to move doors in plan and
3D views is with the mouse.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Using Dimensions
Any object located by either a temporary
dimension or a regular dimension can be
moved using the dimension value itself. This
is the best method to precisely position an
object. See Moving Objects Using
Dimensions on page 690.
214
Move Restrictions
A door or window moved against an
intersecting wall will automatically stop
when it is the casing distance from the
intersecting wall. This is appropriate and
desirable in most situations. Sometimes this
restriction must be removed. The restriction
can be removed by placing a check in the
Ignore Casing for Opening Resize check
box in the Plan Defaults dialog. See Plan
Defaults on page 91.
Sometimes breaks in walls restrict the
relocation of an opening along an apparently
empty wall. Breaks in walls are not always
obvious, especially when the walls are the
same type and in perfect alignment. To check
for this situation, select the wall: two handles
will appear at each end. See Repairing
Broken Walls on page 153.
Centering Doors
If an opening such as a door is selected,
the Center Object edit button displays
in the Edit toolbar. To center an opening:
1.
2.
3.
4.
edit button.
Hinged Doors
To change the swing using edit buttons:
3.
1.
2.
3.
edit button.
2.
3.
edit
2.
215
2.
3.
2.
3.
Pocket Doors
To change the direction using edit buttons:
1.
2.
Sliding Doors
To edit a sliding door using edit buttons:
1.
1.
2.
2.
Side
3.
edit button.
216
edit button.
Resizing Doors
3.
3.
edit
1.
2.
3.
Bifold Doors
To change the hinged side using edit
buttons:
1.
2.
edit button.
Resizing Doors
Doors can be resized in floor plan view, 3D
views, cross section/elevation views, and in
the Door Specification dialog.
217
Doors
pointer
Special Doors
Wrapped Openings
Wrapped
openings of
various shapes
are available in
the Doorway
Library
.
You can also
create a wrapped
opening by
placing a
doorway in the
wall and
checking
Suppress Casing in the Frame and Trim tab
of the Door Specification dialog. Note
that the base molding wraps around the
opening.
Openings in Railings
Use a doorway to open up a railing for a
stairway or other access. To open up a railing
218
Custom Muntins
door(s).
219
Doors
General Tab
1
2
3
5
4
6
7
8
220
Options Tab
Doors
221
Curved Options
If a door is placed in a curved wall, some
additional options display on the Options tab
of the Door Specification dialog.
222
Straight
Radial
Parallel
Radial with
Curved
Door
Doors
1
2
3
4
6
223
Lites Tab
The options on this tab are only available for
glass doors. See General Tab on page 220.
1
3
5
2
4
6
224
Normal Diamond
Prairie
Craftsman
Doors
225
Arch Tab
1
3
5
2
4
226
Hardware Tab
5
7
9
Doors
4
6
8
227
Moldings Tab
1
2
228
Door Defaults
Layer Tab
For information about the Layers tab, see
Layer Tab on page 123.
Materials Tab
For information about the Materials tab, see
Materials Tab on page 603.
Label Tab
For information about the Label tab, see
Label Tab on page 485.
Door Defaults
To open the Door Defaults dialog, doubleclick the Door Tools
parent button.
229
Doors
230
Chapter 9:
Windows
Windows
Chapter Overview
Chief Architect comes with a wide variety of
windows. Fixed glass, hung, casement,
sliding, awning, hopper, and louver window
styles can all be created with the standard
window tool, and even set as the default. The
shape of a window can be angled or made
into a round top or other arch styles. Chief
Architect can create bay, box, and bow
windows at the click of a button. In addition,
the library contains many mulled window
combinations and manufacturer-specific
products.
Once windows have been placed in the
model, the program can automatically
generate a window schedule. Select Tools>
Schedules> Window... to create a window
schedule. See Creating Schedules on page
928.
Chapter Contents
Window Defaults
Window Types
Window Levels
Displaying Windows
Selecting Windows
Deleting Windows
Copying Windows
Moving Windows
Resizing Windows
Centering Windows
Windows in Curved Walls
Custom Muntins
Editing Bay, Box, and Bow Windows
Bay, Box, Bow Windows & Roofs
Window Specification Dialog
Window Default Settings
Window Defaults
Default Settings can be accessed by
231
Window Types
Use the Build> Window menu or click the
Window Tools
parent button to activate
the window child buttons.
Standard Windows
Standard window refers to a window
that is not one of the special types such
as bay, box, bow, corner or blocked as
described below. All these special types are
made up of multiple standard windows.
Click on a wall using the Window
tool
to place a window. The type of window
placed is set in the Window Defaults
dialog; but it can be edited after it is placed.
When a standard window is part of a special
window, it is called a component window.
Bay Windows
The roof will be affected whenever a
Bay Window, Box Window, or Bow
Window is created. Therefore, these windows should be placed before the roof is
built.
232
Box Windows
A Box window is a bay window with
side angles set to 90 degrees.
Click in a wall using the Box Window
child tool to produce a box window. The
component windows are specified in the
Window Defaults dialog. Their sizes
adjust to fit the available space. Box
windows initially measure 4-2 wide with a
depth of 1-6.
Window Types
Bow Windows
A Bow Window is a group of wall
segments that create a segmented
curve. Bow windows can be composed of
two to twenty identical sections.
Click in a wall using the Bow Window
child tool to produce a 5-section bow
window. The component windows are
specified in the Window Defaults dialog.
Their sizes adjust to fit the available space.
The 5-section bow below has a 4-10 radius
centered 3-9 inside the wall, giving an
opening 5-10 across and a depth of 11.
edit button.
Windows Library
233
Windows
Stacked Windows
Corner Windows
2
1
0
234
Ctrl
Window Types
Windows
Blocked Units
Blocking windows and doors together gives
you added flexibility when mulling units
together. It creates a combination of units
which move and copy as a single unit. It
allows you to list the doors and windows in
the Material List either as a single unit or as
the components, and it enables you to define
a single opening or separate openings in the
wall framing for the blocked unit.
To create a Blocked Unit, group select
several openings, doors and windows that are
on the same wall and within 24 inches (sideto-side or top to bottom) of each other. Click
the Make Block
edit button to create a
block. Once doors and windows are
combined in a block they can be moved and
copied as a single unit.
The group selection can be done in floor plan
view or in any 3D view. floor plan views
work fine for blocking windows that are
positioned side-by-side, but you will want to
use an elevation view for blocking objects
235
2.
3.
4.
edit
1.
236
button.
Window Levels
237
Windows
Window Levels
Displaying Windows
In Floor Plan View
The display of windows, window sizes, and
headers in floor plan view can be controlled
in the Layer Display Options dialog. See
Displaying Objects on page 125.
If the window sizes layer is set to display,
size labels display centered on the windows
that they represent. Label format and size is
specified in the Window Schedule
Specification dialog. For more, see
Creating Schedules on page 928.
The size displays in the format 3040,
which is width by height in feet and inches.
In 3D Views
Click the Display Options
button in any
3D view to open the Layer Display
Options dialog. This dialog allows objects
to be turned on and off by layer. See Layer
Display Options Dialog on page 119.
Selecting Windows
The simplest way to select a window is to
click on it using the Window
or Select
Object
tool. Click the Open Object
edit button to open the window and access
the Window Specification dialog. In this
dialog you can resize the window; change its
type; or modify its trim and other features. If
you just want to resize the window, you can
do so using the edit handles.
Multiple Windows
Multiple windows can be selected and edited
as a group. Select one window, then hold
down the Shift key while clicking on other
238
Deleting Windows
Explode Block
edit button.
Selecting Components
of Blocked Units
Blocked units are made up of individual
doors and windows. To select an individual
component of a blocked unit, first select the
blocked unit. Press the Tab key on your
keyboard and the component whose center is
closest to where you clicked will be selected.
This selection technique can be used in floor
plan or 3D views.
The selected component may be on any level
in the blocked unit. If you have multiple
levels, it is easiest to select the components
Deleting Windows
Select any window and press the
Del
key or
edit
Copying Windows
Any window or group of windows can be
copied except bay, box or bow window units.
239
Windows
Copy/Paste
edit button. Click anywhere in the second plan to activate it,
and click on a wall to paste the copy.
Paste
tool. To copy along the same wall
in the 3D view, grab the center handle and
drag the copy away from the original.
Moving Windows
A window or group of windows can be
moved by selecting it and then dragging from
the center handle. It can also be moved by
changing a value in a dimension line.
Note that when a window is selected, the
window size displays. If the window is not
already located by regular dimension lines,
temporary dimensions can be displayed by
clicking the Display Temporary
Dimensions
toggle button. Dimensions
are critical when positioning a window or
any other object.
240
Using Dimensions
Any object located by either a temporary
dimension or a regular dimension can be
moved by editing the dimension itself. This
method is recommended to precisely locate
windows and other objects.
Select the window to be moved; drag it along
the wall; and observe which dimensions
update. These are the dimensions which can
be used to move the window. See Moving
Objects Using Dimensions on page 690.
Move Restrictions
A window moved against an intersecting
wall automatically stops when the distance
from the intersecting wall equals the width of
the window casing. Disable this restriction
by checking Ignore Casing For Opening
Resize within the Plan Defaults dialog.
A window moved against a break in a wall
automatically stops. To verify that a wall is
Resizing Windows
Windows
Resizing Windows
When you select a window, the window size
label displays the width followed by the
height. For example, a 3040 window is 3-0
wide by 4-0 high.
There are two methods of resizing windows.
241
Centering Windows
When a window or door is selected, the
Center Object edit button displays.
Centering To Fixtures
Along a Wall
To center a window along a wall, click the
Center Object
edit button; then click in
floor plan view on the side of the wall where
the window is to be centered. If you want to
center it in a room, click inside the room. If
you want to center it to the exterior of the
building, click outside the building.
Straight
Because the casing is
straight, it will not
properly fit in the wall
opening if the window is
too wide or the curve of the wall is too
extreme. In these cases use one of the other
two window types described below.
242
Custom Muntins
Radial
Parallel
Custom Muntins
Design your own muntins for the glazing of a
window or door. Muntins are formed from a
CAD block composed of lines and arcs
drawn over window or door glass in a cross
section/elevation view. The CAD block
should cover at least half the glass
horizontally and one quarter of the area
vertically, but should not overlap it in either
direction by more than five percent.
Creating Muntins
To create custom muntins, take a Cross
Section/Elevation
view of the wall
that contains the window or door and zoom
in on the window or door to receive the
custom muntins. Toggle to CAD mode and
draw lines and arcs to represent the desired
muntins. Try to make them start and end as
close to the edge of the glass as possible. If
the lines are slightly over, the program will
clip these ends so that they fit exactly.
When the muntin design is complete, group
select all lines and arcs and define them as a
243
Windows
Removing Muntins
Remove custom muntins from a door
or window by selecting the opening in
cross section/elevation view and clicking on
the Unload Muntins
button on the Edit
toolbar. The muntins will disappear and the
original CAD block will take their place. You
may explode and edit these blocks and reload
them.
244
Resizing Components
If you select the bay and then use the Tab key
to select the individual component windows
13
1
Bay Window
Specification Dialog
The Bay Window Specification dialog
is opened when you select a Bay Window in
floor plan view and click the Open Object
edit button. There are many options in
this dialog that can be set for the individual
item. They cannot be set as defaults. Many of
these same options are available for Box and
Bow windows.
3
7
9
11
2
4
6
8
10
12
245
Windows
246
When originally
created, the ceiling
within a bay, box, or
bow windows is the
same height as the
default ceiling for that
floor.
Both the top and
bottom heights of these
window units may be
adjusted from a 3D
view.
Use the following
techniques for
modifying any bay, box, or bow window.
Displaying Bay
and Bow Windows
The color and display of bay and bow
windows in floor plan view is controlled by
the manual dimension layer. See Displaying
Objects on page 125.
Hip Roofs
Unless a different option is selected, a hip
roof will be built above the unit when roofs
are automatically generated.
247
Windows
Ceilings
248
3.
4.
Once the roof planes are shaped properly, open the Build Roof dialog and
select the Build Fascia, Gutters option
to complete the roof. Do not select Build
Roof Planes.
Windows
Gable Roof
A gable roof is not one of the automatic
options for the roof above a bay, box or bow
window. A gable can be created by manually
editing the rectangular hip roofs that are
automatically created. See Manual Roofs
on page 295.
1.
249
General Tab
1
2
4
5
250
Double Hung
Left Sliding
251
Windows
Triple Casement
Options Tab
1
3
252
4 Recessed - Select
Typical
Recessed
Not Recessed
1
3
253
Windows
1
3
2
4
254
255
Windows
1
2
256
Casing Tab
1
2
5
7
Windows
4
6
257
check box to
remove the apron. Select
this box to add an apron
below the sill. The
Extends value will
extend the sill and apron
together.
258
Lites Tab
3
4
Windows
Lites in fixed
Lites in moveable
259
260
Windows
Shape Tab
1
3
2
4
7
261
6 Match Roof -
262
Arch Tab
1
3
2
4
Windows
Treatments Tab
The Treatments tab of the Window
Specification dialog is similar to the
Hardware tab of the Door Specification
dialog. See Hardware Tab on page 227.
263
Moldings Tab
1
1 Interior/Exterior - Select a radio
264
Layer Tab
For information about using the Layers tab,
see Layer Tab on page 123.
Materials Tab
For information about using the Materials
tab, see Materials Tab on page 603.
Label Tab
For information about using the Label tab,
see Label Tab on page 485.
and go to
1.
2.
3.
Windows
265
266
Chapter 10:
Floors
Chapter Overview
Chapter Contents
Floor Defaults
Working With Multiple Floors
Adding Floors
Deleting Floors
Copying Floors
The Current Floor
Reference Floor
Floors
Floor Defaults
Floor Defaults for the current floor are
accessed by selecting Edit> Default
Settings...
from the menu; then choosing
Floor from the category tree. The Floor
Defaults
tool button can also be added to
a toolbar for quicker access to the Floor
Defaults dialog.
267
Floor Tools
Click the Floor Tools parent button to
display its child buttons to the right.
Click the Rebuild Walls/Floors/Ceilings
child button to force Chief Architect to
recalculate the relationship between the
walls, floors, and ceilings in your model. See
Automatic Rebuild of Floors & Ceilings
on page 319.
Click the Build New Floor
child button
to build a new floor. A new floor can be
generated that is based upon the perimeter of
the floor below or a blank floor plan can be
created and drawn from scratch. See
Adding Floors on page 269.
268
Adding Floors
2.
3.
4.
parent button
. The Insert
269
Floors
Adding Floors
Adding a Foundation
To add a foundation, select Build> Floor>
Build Foundation
or click the child
button. See Building a Foundation on page
274.
Exchanging Floors
Clicking the Exchange With Floor Above
or Exchange With Floor Below
child button will swap the current floor with
the floor above or below. The floor that was
Deleting Floors
Click the Delete Current Floor
child
button to remove the current floor from the
plan. If there is a floor above, it will become
Copying Floors
If you would like to make a copy of an
existing floor to be used on a new floor, the
Edit Area
tools can be helpful. See Edit
Area Tools on page 816.
270
Reference Floor
and the
buttons.
or
Change Floor
If there are multiple floors, click the Change
Floor/Reference
Floors
Reference Floor
Only one floor can be active at any given
time. Once there is more than one floor in a
model, it is helpful to see how different
floors relate to each other. Any floor can be
displayed as a Reference Floor along with
the current floor. The reference floor is
visible but cannot be edited.
By default, the floor below the current floor
is the reference floor, but any floor can be
referenced using the Change Floor/
Reference dialog. To open the dialog,
click the Change Floor/Reference
button. If the Reference Display
or off, it will remain so.
Reference Display
To display the reference floor, select
Tools> Reference Floors> Reference
Display
was on
271
Swap Floor/Reference
If one floor is defined as the current
floor, and another floor is defined as
the reference floor, use the Swap Floor/
Reference
button to quickly switch the
status of the two plans.
272
Chapter 11:
Foundations
Chapter Overview
tool.
Chapter Contents
Foundation Defaults
Building a Foundation
New Floor Dialog
Displaying Foundations
Deleting Foundations
Aligning Stem Walls and Footings
Resizing Stem Walls
The Slab Tools
Rebuilding Monolithic Slab Foundations
Editing Piers and Grade Beam Foundations
Editing Piers & Pads
Foundations and Room Specification
Slab Specification Dialog
Foundation Defaults
Default Settings are accessed by
selecting Edit> Default Settings... .
There can be only one foundation floor per
plan. Because the settings in the Foundation Defaults dialog determine foundation
child
273
Foundations
Building a Foundation
Foundations built automatically are based on
the placement of walls on the first floor. At
least one room must be defined on the first
floor for a foundation to be automatically
generated.
Three foundation types are available: piers,
footings and monolithic slab. The first two
options are composed of walls; the latter
creates a Slab with Footing polyline.
While only one foundation type can be built
automatically, you can add additional walls,
piers and slabs to any foundation after it is
generated.
to open the
Foundation Tab
1
3
5
10
11
12
7
13
274
Building a Foundation
Footings
Spread footings are used in conjunction with
stem walls. The footing is typically wider
than the stem wall and runs continuously
under the base of the wall.
275
Foundations
Mudsills
7 Mudsill Size - Enter a Width and
down list.
If the Default (wood frame 16"OC) wall
type is selected, the thickness can be defined
by the Wall Thickness field to the left. The
thickness of any other wall type is defined by
the wall layer definition.
Note: If you plan to turn the foundation wall
into a pony wall, a wall type other than
Default (concrete) must be selected.
Monolithic Slab
10 Monolithic Slab - Select this option to
build a slab foundation with a perimeter
footing. This foundation is the floor platform
276
Piers
11 Piers - Select this option to generate a
Materials Tab
1
inch.
Use Mesh - Select the check box to
reinforce the slab floor with mesh
instead of rebar; or uncheck it to use rebar.
277
Foundations
2
1 Derive new Foundation plan from
Displaying Foundations
In floor plan view, footings are drawn with
dashed lines and walls, with solid lines.
Automatically generated piers are drawn
using a dashed line style and are centered on
the grade beam.
The grade beam is represented by two solid
lines. It aligns with the wall above unless
specified otherwise.
Deleting Foundations
Once built, the foundation plan is
separate from the first floor plan. If you
change the position of exterior walls on the
first floor plan, the foundation is not updated.
Use the Rebuild Slab
tool to rebuild
foundation slabs automatically. To update
walls, however, you must either edit them in
the foundation plan; or delete the foundation
and rebuild them.
278
In 3D Views
Individual stem walls can be selected and
edited in cross section/elevation view to
move the footing up or down.
Foundations
279
Slabs
Click the Slab
or Slab With
Footing
child button and click
and drag in floor plan view to create a slab.
The slab appears and can be edited as a
polyline in floor plan view. See Editing
Polylines on page 771.
To edit its height and thickness, select the
slab and click the Open Object
edit
button to open the Slab Specification
dialog. See Slab Specification Dialog on
page 283.
Slab Holes
A hole can be placed in a slab or in
the floor of a foundation slab with
footings. Click the Slab Hole
Platform Holes
Click the Platform Hole
button
and draw a polyline to place a hole in a
ceiling or floor platform above the current
floor. If the foundation level is currently
displayed in floor plan view, a hole will be
placed in the floor platform for the first floor.
You may need to add this button to your
toolbar. See Adding Toolbar Buttons on
page 18.
or Slab
280
and clicking on a
or Square Pad
child tool.
Click on an existing pier or pad at the wall to
select it. Three edit handles display,
allowing the pier or pad to be moved and
resized.
Resize the selected pier or pad by dragging in or out from either of the two side
handles. To resize a pier or pad if one side
is all the way against an outside wall
intersection, select the pier or pad, hold
down the Ctrl key and drag using the
inside handle.
Move the selected pier or pad by grabbing the center handle and dragging it
along the wall. It stops automatically
underneath an exterior corner.
or Square
281
Foundations
edit button or
Garages
A room labeled Garage on the first floor
produces a room in an automatically
produced footings or pier foundation plan.
The Structure tab in the Room
Specification dialog for the Garage
foundation "room" displays the following
settings:
282
Structure Tab
Two of the options on the Structure tab of
the Room Specification dialog affect the
foundation. Slab foundation for this room
and Floor for this room is supplied by the
foundation room from the floor below.
See Structure Tab on page 205.
General Tab
1
2
3
Foundations
Polyline Tab
283
Materials Tab
284
Chapter 12:
Roofs
Chapter Contents
Roof Defaults
Automatic Roofs vs. Manual Roofs
The Roof Tools
Automatically Generated Roof Styles
Some Common Roof Types
Roof Baseline Polylines
Manual Roofs
Roof Planes
Curved Roof Planes
Dormers
Roof Returns
Displaying Roof Planes
Deleting Roof Planes
Editing Roof Planes
Editing Curved Roof Planes
Editing Auto Dormers
Locating Roof Plane Intersections
Ceiling Planes
Gable/Roof Line
Skylights
Gutters
Gable Over Door/Window
Automatic Rebuild of Floors & Ceilings
Build Roof Dialog
Roof Baseline Specification Dialog
Roof Plane Specification Dialog
Ceiling Plane Specification Dialog
Dormer Specification Dialog
Dormer Defaults
Roof Hole/Skylight Specification Dialog
Roof Pitches in Degrees
285
Roofs
Chapter Overview
Roof Defaults
Most objects in Chief Architect derive their
intial values from their respective default
dialog. For example, a newly placed
Window
will get its initial values from
the Window Defaults dialog and a newly
placed Hinged Door
will get its initial
values from the Door Defaults dialog.
Once placed in a plan, the initial values for
these objects can be overridden by opening
them for specification and editing them. This
concept of default settings applies similarly
to roofs, with a few variations.
For the most part, the Build Roof dialog
functions as the "Roof Defaults" dialog.
Many, but not all, initial default values for
both manually drawn and automatically
generated roofs are derived from this dialog.
See Build Roof Dialog on page 319.
Automatically
Generated Roofs
When roofs are automatically generated,
initial Pitch and Overhang values are
derived from the Build Roof dialog. The
bulk of the information that determines
where and how roof planes will be
automatically generated is contained in the
286
Manually Drawn
Roof Systems
Any roof system that can be created
automatically can be created manually. The
advantage to drawing roof systems manually
is that each roof plane is drawn and edited
individually, offering full control over the
process and limiting the possibilities only to
your imagination. The disadvantage to
drawing roofs manually is that it takes longer
to create them and when walls below them
have moved, they must be edited or redrawn.
287
Roofs
Automatically
Generated Roofs
Roof Plane
Click the Roof Plane child button to
draw a roof plane manually. Doubleclick the Roof Plane
child button to
display the Build Roof dialog and specify
the settings for automatically generated
roofs.
Skylights
Click the Skylight child button and
drag over an existing roof plane to
create a skylight. The skylight, skylight
shaft, and ceiling hole (if a ceiling exists) are
drawn at the same time. See Skylights on
page 317.
Ceiling Plane
Click the Ceiling Plane child button to
draw a ceiling plane manually.
Manually drawn ceiling planes behave very
similarly to manually drawn roof planes. See
Ceiling Planes on page 312.
Gable/Roof Line
Use the Gable/Roof Line child button
to draw a gable line that will generate a
gable condition when roofs are automatically
generated.
The Gable/Roof Line
child button is
most commonly used to define the location
of a gable along a longer wall. A gable/roof
line can also be used to place a gable within a
roof plane or to extend a continuous roof
when there is no wall below.
Auto Dormer
Click the Auto Dormer child button
and click within a roof plane to place a
dormer. See Dormers on page 300.
Fix Roofs
Clicking the Fix Roofs child button
will remove breaks where a single edge
of one roof plane meets with the broken edge
of another in a ridge or valley. See Aligning
Roof Edges on page 306.
288
1
2
3
4
289
Roofs
Pitch
2 Any exterior wall can define the pitch
of the roof plane built above it.
Before
Full Gable
Wall
Extend Slope
Downward
After
290
2.
3.
4.
6.
291
Roofs
5.
Hip Roof
4.
5.
Full Gable
Wall
Gable Roof
A gable roof is produced if the two opposite
walls, or roof plane baseline segments, are
defined as Full Gable Wall in the Roof tab
of the Wall Specification dialog.
292
1.
2.
3.
High Shed/
Gable Wall
Editing Roof
Baseline Polylines
Roof baselines can be edited and used as the
basis for the generation of a new roof plan.
They can be reshaped in 2D like CAD
polylines. Like walls, edges can have roof
information defined in them. When edited,
attached roof plane baselines will stay at the
same baseline height. If roof planes exist at
more than one baseline height, each height
will generate its own set of Roof Baselines.
293
Roofs
An Example
For a simple example of roof plane baseline
editing, consider an L-shaped house, with a
rectangular roof. The inner part of the L is a
patio that is covered under the same roof.
2.
3.
4.
294
Click OK to close the dialog. Roof information is displayed along the roof plane
baselines. Abbreviations used are: V vertical (against wall), G -gable/shed, K
- kneewall, and L - lower (extend slope
downward).
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Manual Roofs
Manual Roofs
Before automatically generating roofs it is
important to understand how the manual roof
editing tools can be used to create and edit
roof planes. The manual roof editing tools
take advantage of the parameters of
neighboring roof planes and walls to partially
automate the process of drawing a roof plan.
Creating a roof plane is a simple task. Once
created it can be edited in two ways.
Roof Planes
Roof planes are essentially 3D CAD
polylines. They are created and edited
in 2D (floor plan view) like polylines, given
pitch and elevation information, and then
modeled in 3D.
1.
2.
3.
The Baseline
The baseline displays an upslope tick in the
middle of the line. The upslope tick indicates
the direction that the roof plane slopes up to.
You cannot redefine the direction of the
slope. If the upslope tick is pointing the
wrong direction, delete the roof plane and
draw another.
The baseline can be used by the program as
the pivot point for the roof plane. In a cross
section, the baseline is the point where the
outside main layer surface of the wall would
295
Roofs
The roof plane overhangs in the downslope direction from the baseline.
296
2.
3.
5.
6.
7.
297
Roofs
4.
4.
2.
5.
298
Compound Curved
Roof Planes
Compound roof planes consisting of two or
more roof planes that merge together can be
defined using curved roofs. To illustrate this,
well produce a flared "Thai" style roof eave
that is almost flat at the eave edge and
merges into an 8 in 12 pitch roof.
To create a compound curved roof
2.
3.
4.
5.
Roofs
1.
299
Dormers
Dormers can be drawn manually or placed
automatically using the Auto Dormer tools.
300
Dormers
The kneewall does not have to be designated as such on the Roof tab of the Wall
Specification dialog unless an automatic roof is being generated.
Auto Dormer
Click the Auto Dormer child button
then click on the roof plane where you
want the center of the dormer's front wall to
be.
The walls of an auto dormer go to the floor
and meet with a kneewall on either side on
the back of the dormer. This kneewall must
run parallel to the underlying roof plane.
Dormer Defaults
The width, height and other parameters for
new dormers can be set in the Dormer
Defaults dialog, accessed by double
clicking either of the Auto Dormer buttons or
via the Default Settings dialog. See
Dormer Defaults on page 334.
Editing Dormers
Auto dormers are like other objects in Chief
Architect. They can be selected and edited in
a variety of ways. See Editing Auto
Dormers on page 310.
Roofs
The roof over an auto dormer can be a Hip,
Gable, Shed, Gambrel, Mansard or Barrel.
See Dormer Specification Dialog on page
331.
301
Roofs
Roof Returns
A roof return is a small decorative roof plane
that connects to the low side of a gable roof
overhang and extends below the upper
triangular portion of the gable wall. The
pictures below show examples of the three
styles of roof returns that can be produced
automatically.
Gable
Hip
Full
302
2
3
4
edit
press the
button.
Del
Roofs
303
304
D
E
B Midpoint
edit
handle
These
corners
move
freely
2.
3.
4.
Adding an Edge
To add an edge to a roof plane use the Break
Line
edit button, which appears when
you have selected a roof edge. You can use
this tool to divide the edge of a rectangular
roof plane into two edges.
1.
Roofs
305
306
2.
edit button.
Move to be Coplanar
The Move to be Coplanar edit button
allows you to move the selected roof
plane to be coplanar (in the same plane) with
the next selected roof plane. The results can
be easily seen in a cross section view.
Raising/Lowering
Roof Planes
Select a roof plane or group of roof planes
and click the Transform/Replicate Object
edit button to open the Transform/
Replicate Object dialog. In this dialog
you can raise or lower the selected roof
plane(s) and perform a variety of other
2
4
5
3
307
Roofs
3.
Changing the
Baseline Angle
A roof plane baseline can be selected like
any line and edited. If the baseline coincides
with a roof edge then select that roof edge
and hit the Tab key to select the baseline. The
status bar will tell you when the roof plane
baseline is selected.
If the roof plane baseline is moved in floor
plan view, its height will not change. Moving
a roof plane baseline up its roof plane toward
the ridge will lower the roof plane.
The baseline angle can be set in the Roof
Plane Specification dialog. See Roof
Plane Specification Dialog on page 326.
308
2.
309
Roofs
2.
3.
310
Move
Resize
Exploding Dormers
When an auto dormer is selected, the
Explode Auto Dormer edit button
displays. Click this button to explode the
auto dormer into its component parts. The
dormer walls, roof planes, window, and hole
in the roof/ceiling can all be edited
separately.
2.
3.
311
Roofs
roof plane
intersections
marked with
an X
Ceiling Planes
Ceiling planes are a lot like roof planes. They
are drawn the same way and can be edited
using the same tools. They are useful for
creating custom sloped ceilings.
To draw a ceiling plane
1.
2.
3.
4.
Ceiling planes
child but-
312
Gable/Roof Line
edit but-
Object
Gable/Roof Line
tool should be
313
Roofs
Door/Window
edit button. See Gable
Over Door/Window on page 318.
Gable lines should be outside the wall,
within the first 18" (450 mm). If the gable
line is placed on the wall it will not work.
Position a gable line of the correct length to
represent the portion of wall above which
supports a gable roof. The gable lines length
determines the gables width at the walls
main layer, not at the overhang. A gable roof
will be wider than the gable line by twice the
overhang distance.
Since the gable line is a CAD line, it can be
selected and modified using the Line
Specification dialog. Length and position
can be specified with dimensions typed in
this dialog.
314
Gable/Roof Line
Roofs
Covering Alcoves
315
Multiple Copy
The Multiple Copy
and Transform/
Replicate Object
edit buttons allow you
to make multiple copies of a selected gable
line at defined increments, as shown in the
following illustration. The leftmost gable
line was created, then 3 copies were made at
8 foot increments.
original
copies
316
Skylights
Skylights
A skylight can be created by clicking
the Skylight child button and drawing
a rectangular polyline within a single roof
plane. Placing a skylight does three things. A
flat panel skylight is placed into a roof hole,
a hole is produced in the flat ceiling platform
below, and the skylight shaft between these
two holes is automatically produced.
Note: If Ceiling Over This Room is
unchecked in the Room Specification
dialog and a sloping ceiling plane is present
under the roof plane, then a second hole in
this ceiling plane is automatically produced.
This hole is visible, and may be located
directly under the roof hole. It can be moved
and edited separately.
Roofs
Editing Skylights
Select the skylight and click the Open
Object
317
Gutters
Gutters can be added to roof planes. They are
generated whenever Build Fascia, Gutters,
Frieze is checked in the Build Roof dialog
and roofs are automatically regenerated.
318
Opening
button or press
319
Build Tab
1
2
3
4
5
6
9
11
13
7
8
1 Rebuild Walls/Floors/Ceilings -
320
15
10
12
14
16
321
Roofs
click OK.
Correct--Trusses
is checked.
322
Options Tab
3
4
Roofs
323
Gutter Tab
1
2
324
Frieze Tab
1
2
3
plan.
Materials Tab
For information about using the Materials
tab, see Materials Tab on page 603.
325
Roofs
3
1
2
326
General Tab
5
6
7
8
9
10
Roofs
327
328
Polyline Tab
For information about the Polyline tab, see
Polyline Tab on page 741.
329
Roofs
Materials Tab
For information about the Materials tab, see
Materials Tab on page 603.
General Tab
330
Roofs
Specification dialog.
331
General Tab
1
2
3
6
7
8
9
10
11
332
Dormer
height
Dashed line indicates
interior dormer side wall.
Dormer
ceiling
height is
equal to
the ceiling
height of
the room
behind it
333
Roofs
Dormer Defaults
Select Edit> Default Settings...
from
the menu to open the Default Settings
dialog. Select Dormer and click the Edit...
button to open the Dormer Defaults
dialog. You can also double-click either of
the Auto Dormer
1
2
334
Polyline Tab
For information about the Polyline tab, see
Polyline Tab on page 741.
Materials Tab
Roofs
335
336
Chapter 13:
Stairs
Chapter Overview
Chapter Contents
Stair Tools
Stair Direction
Displaying Stairs
Selecting Stairs
Deleting Stairs
Resizing Stairs
Moving Stairs
Rotating Stairs
Copying Stairs
Stair Landings
Merging Stair Sections
Curved Stairs
Changing the Radius of Curved Stairs
Maintaining Tread Width
Creating Winders
Flared Stairs
Starter Treads
Other Special Railings & Stairs
Creating a Stairwell
Creating Rooms Beneath Staircases
Staircase Specification Dialog
Stair Landing Specification Dialog
337
Stairs
Stair Tools
Click the Stair Tools
parent button
to display its child tools to the right
Straight Stairs
Curved Stairs
Click on the Curve to Left
child tool or the Curve to Right
child tool to place a curved staircase.
Stair Direction
When you drag to create a set of stairs, the
stairs are created going UP, so stairs are
should be created on the lower of the two
floors they connect. Stairs drawn in the UP
direction respond to floor heights and will
338
Anatomy of a Staircase
Anatomy of a Staircase
Stairs are often described in terms of rise and
run. Rise is typically between 6" and 8"; and
run, between 10" and 12". In metric plans,
339
Stairs
Rebuild Walls/Floors/Ceilings
calculate the floor platform at the lower
elevation; then draw a normal stair from the
lower platform up to the upper platform. It
will correctly link the two heights.
Displaying Stairs
The display of stairs in all views is controlled
in the Layer Display Options dialog. See
Displaying Objects on page 125.
Since stairs are not on the same floor as the
stairwell opening, only multi-floor views
will simultaneously show both the upper
floor with the opening and the lower floor
with the stairs. Use the Full Camera
Cross Section/Elevation
Overview
; or Full
Selecting Stairs
In floor plan view, click on a stair section in
Straight Stairs
340
Selecting Stairs
Move Radially
Move Side
Change Curve
Center point
Move Stairs
Extend End
Rotate Stairs
Move Side
Stairs
Extend End
Extend End
341
Selected on
Curved Subsection
Selected on
Straight Subsection
Deleting Stairs
Select a stair section or landing. Click the
Delete
Resizing Stairs
342
To resize by dragging, select a stair section. You will be able to stretch the end
which was selected, and the unselected
end will remain locked in place. Drag the
Extend edit handle to lengthen or shorten
the section. If the move is slight, the
width of the treads will be adjusted and
no new treads will be added.
Drag from either side handle to change
the width of the stair section. When
Moving Stairs
Moving Stairs
Move By Dragging
Select the stair section to display the edit
handles. Use the center handle that displays
the Move pointer when the mouse is
placed above it, and drag the stairs to a new
location. The stairs will move perpendicular
to the sides and ends of the selected stair
section, and will stop when they bump into a
wall or rail. Continue until the stairs are
positioned properly. Other stair sections
merged to the selected section or attached by
landings will typically move with the
selected section.
A stair section will stop when it or any stair
section moving with it is moved into a wall.
If it is moving along its length it will also
stop upon one of its ends hitting a landing or
the end of another stair section.
Unrestricted Movement
As with most objects, restrictions on moving
stairs can be overridden if necessary. This is
343
Stairs
Rotating Stairs
Stairs can be rotated by dragging the
triangular handle located outside the stair
section. Dragging this handle in a circular
motion will rotate the stairs around their
center point, unless Rotate/Resize About
Current Point is defined on the CAD page
Copying Stairs
Stairs do not copy in the traditional sense.
Stairs may only be copied using the Edit
Area tool. For information regarding Edit>
Edit Area, see Edit Area Tools on page
816.
To copy stairs, select Edit> Edit Area
Draw a marquee around the stairs to be
copied and click the Copy/Paste
edit
button. Go to the plan or floor where the
stairs are to be placed, and choose Edit>
Paste. Click on the plan to place the copy.
344
Stair Landings
Stair Landings
To create a landing between stair sections:
1.
2.
2.
edit
3.
4.
5.
345
Stairs
Convert Polyline
edit button to
open the Convert Polyline dialog.
Landing Height
Landing heights can be user-defined or
controlled by the program. A landing whose
height is a program-controlled default is said
to be "unlocked". An unlocked landings
height adjusts as the stairs attached to it are
modified.
If, however, you specify a height for a
landing, that landing is said to be "locked". A
locked landing will maintain that height no
matter how you adjust the stairs connected to
that landing.
Unlocked Landings
Normally, the stair sections attached to a
landing determine the height of the landing.
Locked Landings
A locked landing has a specifically defined
height which does not adjust automatically
346
Stair Landings
3.
4.
347
Stairs
1.
348
Curved Stairs
Stairs
Curved Stairs
Curved Stairs can be created using the
Curve to Left
or Curve to Right
349
2.
3.
4.
350
1.
2.
3.
Curved Stairs
1.
2.
3.
351
Stairs
4.
3.
352
A default radius from the center of curvature to the middle of the stairs displays. Change it if you wish, and click
OK.
1.
2.
3.
4.
edit
Multiple Subsections
If a curved subsection is merged end-to-end
to a straight subsection, moving the handle
which lies along the center of the up arrow
Dragging the handle away from the center will make the curved portion tighter
and lengthen the straight subsection.
353
Stairs
2.
3.
4.
The staircase will move so that the center of the radius is aligned with the center of the other curved object.
1.
2.
edit
Walk Line
By default, Chief Architect measures the
length and tread width of a stair section along
354
11"
11"
Measured at
Center of Tread
Ignore Subsection
Boundaries
Uniform tread width can also be maintained
without locking by selecting Ignore
Subsection Boundaries in the General Tab
of the Staircase Specification dialog.
This will maintain a consistent tread width
throughout a stair section, without regard to
subsection boundaries. The tread width value
may change when the stair section is edited,
but will be consistent throughout all
subsections.
Because the program is ignoring the
boundaries where one stair section merges
with another, the treads where a straight
section joins a curved section may become
slightly angled to accomodate the
adjustment.
Measured at
Walk Line
Stairs
355
Creating Winders
Both curved and straight stairs may be turned
into winders. When defined as a winder, the
stairs will extend to fill in any gap between
the side of the stairs and nearby walls.
1.
2.
3.
356
edit button.
4.
Creating Winders
357
Stairs
358
Tight Winders
Flared Stairs
Flared Stairs
Any stair section can be flared using
the Flare/Curve Stairs
edit button.
When this button is selected, a number of
new handles display for editing the stairs.
1.
2.
3.
359
Stairs
2.
1.
360
edit button.
Flared Stairs
1.
2.
edit button.
1.
2.
2.
First, adjust the flared sections curvature:
This time, drag the lower of the two central handles upward. The handle above it
will move with it. This moves the start
361
Stairs
1.
point for the bottom flare from the middle of the section toward its top, making
the flare even more gradual.
Starter Treads
The first and second tread of a
staircase can be modeled with rounded
ends known as starter treads. This is common
with traditional staircases. Starter treads can
be specified on one or both sides of the stair
with the Starter Tread
362
edit button.
Starter Treads
2.
3.
4.
6.
7.
8.
9.
edit button.
edit button.
Stairs
1.
5.
363
Concrete Stairs
2.
3.
Steel Stringer
364
2.
3.
On the Material tab, set the Tread material to Concrete and the Riser/Trim
material to steel.
Creating a Stairwell
Masonry Stairs
2.
3.
On the Material tab, set the Tread material to the masonry material and the
Riser/Trim material to concrete.
1.
2.
Creating a Stairwell
Automatically
3.
4.
365
Stairs
Creating a Stairwell
5.
6.
8.
7.
9.
tool; then
edit button.
In the Room
Specification
1.
Draw a staircase.
2.
366
3.
4.
6.
7.
It is important that all floor heights, ceiling heights, floor thickness and ceiling
thickness be established correctly before
using the Staircase Specification dialog.
Stairs
367
General Tab
4
5
368
369
Stairs
Style Tab
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
6
8
14
16
18
10
370
17
12
Stairs
371
14
13
12
Newels/Balusters Tab
2
3
4
5
1 Rail Height - Specify stair and landing
rail height.
372
3 Baluster specifications.
6 Railing specifications.
4 Newel specifications.
Stairs
373
Handrail Tab
The Handrail tab is used to specify the style
and size of handrailing on a staircase.
374
3
4
Materials Tab
For information about using the Materials
tab, see Materials Tab on page 603.
Stairs
Specification dialog.
375
General Tab
Polyline Tab
For information about the Materials tab, see
Polyline Tab on page 741.
1
2
3
376
Materials Tab
For information about the Materials tab, see
Materials Tab on page 603.
Framing
Chapter Overview
Manual Framing members are produced by
clicking and dragging, like drawing a wall.
Automatic Framing is produced by
selecting the various Build Framing check
boxes on the appropriate tabs of the Build
Framing dialog.
Trusses are covered in their own chapter,
Trusses on page 407.
Chapter Contents
Framing Defaults
Manual Framing vs. Automatic Framing
The Framing Tools
Automatic Framing
Framing Defaults/Build Framing Dialog
Framing Reference Markers
Bearing Lines
Joist Direction Lines
Wall Framing Details
Drawing Wall Framing Members
Displaying Framing
Editing Framing
Regenerating Framing
Framing and the Material List
Framing Specification Dialog
Beam Specification Dialog
Post Specification Dialog
Framing Defaults
Select Edit> Default Settings... to
access the Default Settings dialog.
Framing is automatically generated
according to the settings in the Framing
Defaults dialog. To edit automatic framing,
377
Framing
Chapter 14:
Wall/Floor/Ceiling
Framing
The Wall, Openings, and Headers tabs of the
Build Framing dialog determine how wall
framing is automatically generated. It is a
good idea to set up framing specifications in
the Build Framing dialog before drawing.
Although these settings can be changed,
finalizing them as early as possible will save
time.
Framing is not built until the Build
Framing dialog is opened and the check
box on each tab that says Build next to it is
selected. For example, Build Wall
Framing is found on the Wall tab; Build
Ceiling Framing, on the different floor tabs
Roof Framing
Rafters, trusses, or a mixture of the two are
supported for roof framing. Trusses are
manually drawn and are covered in the
following chapter, Trusses on page 407.
Rafters can be manually drawn or produced
automatically on the Roof tab in the
Framing dialog.
If you are going to have both truss and
automatically produced stick framing,
draw the trusses first and then use the
Frmaing dialog to produce stick framing.
The stick framing will be placed only in areas
not supported by trusses, and will be cut and
butted to the trusses where appropriate.
378
Rafter
Roof Truss
Select Build> Framing> Roof Truss
Roof Beam
Floor/Ceiling Truss
Floor/Ceiling Beam
Select Build> Framing> Floor/
Ceiling Beam
379
Framing
Joist
Bearing Line
Line
and click and drag on floor
plan view. See Bearing Lines on page 396.
Post
Joist Direction
380
or Roof Blocking
or Roof Block-
Wall Bridging
Bridging for walls can be created after walls
are framed. Select Exterior or Interior; and
In Line or Stagger bridging on the Wall tab
of the Build Framing dialog to define both
automatically and manually drawn bridging.
See Framing Defaults/Build Framing
Dialog on page 382.
Automatically-created wall bridging can be
viewed in a wall detail and edited just as joist
blocking is edited in floor plan view.
Bridging can also be drawn in CAD mode by
selecting CAD> Boxes & Framing> Wall
Bridging
. Wall bridging must be drawn
perpendicular to the studs; therefore it is
always horizontal in a wall detail. Bridging
should start and end at a stud surface.
See Wall Framing Details on page 400.
Automatic Framing
Joists and Rafters
Joists and rafters can be automatically
produced in ceiling and floor platforms and
roof planes. Select the Build Framing check
box on the appropriate tabs in the Build
Framing dialog. See Framing Defaults/
Build Framing Dialog on page 382.
381
Framing
Automatic Framing
Joist Orientation
If a Joist Direction
line exists somewhere in the platform, it dictates the
direction of the floor or ceiling joists
when automatic framing is generated.
If there is no Joist Direction
line,
automatically generated joists will run
perpendicular to and across any Floor/
Ceiling Beam
or Bearing Line
you have drawn.
382
Framing dialog is
identical to the Framing Defaults
dialog with one exception: the Build
Framing dialog has Build check boxes
Floor Tabs
The Build Framing dialog opens at the
current floors framing tab, for example,
Foundation, 1st or 2nd. Each tab specifies
framing for specific floors or assemblies.
You can switch between tabs to define all
settings.
3
5
7
9
10
11
12
6
8
383
Framing
384
9
10 Rim Joist - This applies to floor
framing only. Check this to automatically produce a rim joist across the ends of
the floor joists. If this is not checked, line
blocking across the ends of the floor joists is
usually drawn in later.
Wall Tab
1
3
11
10
385
Framing
Wall
1 Build Wall Framing - Check this box
386
Plates
7 Specify the Number of Top Plates. A
Framing
Openings Tab
1
3
5
7
2
4
8
9
Trimmer
Normally one trimmer, or stud supporting a
header, is placed on each side of an opening.
This number can be increased based on the
width of an opening.
387
388
Sills
8 Thickness - Specify the thickness for
Framing
Headers Tab
3
5
4
6
389
Posts/Beams Tab
3
2
6
7
8
11
view.
390
10
tool.
Roof Tab
1
3
2
4
5
6
edit button.
391
Framing
4 If Angled
Dormer Hole is
checked, a gable roof
dormer creates a five
sided hole in a roof
plane, with the two top
edges formed by the
valleys of the dormer.
An angled doubleheader runs between
the doubled rafters on
one side to the ridge.
On the opposite side, a shorter angled
doubled header frames the other valley.
If the Angled Dormer
Hole check box is
cleared, a rectangular
hole is framed to
contain the dormer
area, with its double
headers placed where
the peak of the dormer
roof meets the main
roof plane. Rafters are
placed within this hole at the top along the
valleys formed by the dormer roof sections.
If the top cross headers do not fit within the
roof plane, angled headers are produced
regardless of the state of the check box.
Rafter Type - Select the type of rafter
from the menu. The list includes
lumber, I-joist, glulam, engineered lumber,
lvl, steel-I and steel box. This changes the
type for rafters, but not for ridges or fascia.
392
Framing
Trusses Tab
5
6
393
Truss Spacing
To set the truss spacing, select any truss,
framing object, or CAD object in floor plan
view, then click the Multiple Copy
edit
button. The Multiple Copy dialog opens if
the Multiple Copy
edit button is clicked
again. This dialog sets the truss spacing as
well as spacing for CAD objects. The
spacing for joists, rafters and wall studs
displays but cannot be set in this dialog.
These spacings are set in the Build
Framing dialog.
Materials Tab
The Material tab sets the default materials
used for framing objects appearing in 3D and
render views. These material specifications
are not used for material take-offs. Materials
List information, is derived from the
structure type of each framing object.
Changes made on the Materials tab of the
Build Framing dialog only effect
subsequently created framing, whether it is
automatically generated or manually drawn.
The Materials tab of the Build Framing
dialog is the same as the Materials tab on
many other specification dialogs. See
Materials Tab on page 603.
394
2.
3.
4.
Placing Framing
Reference Markers
To place a Framing Reference Marker, select
Build> Framing> Framing Reference
Marker
. Click in floor plan view to
place the framing reference marker, where it
will display A corner of the first framing
member will snap to this point and all other
framing members will be laid out from there.
2.
3.
395
Framing
Multiple Copy
Bearing Lines
Bearing lines are drawn just like lines
or walls: they can be single, straight
lines or drawn in segments that jog. Select
Build> Framing> Bearing Line
396
Joist Direction
Specification Dialog
The Joist Direction Line contains the joist
depth and spacing information for the floor
or ceiling platform containing it.
397
Framing
2.
3.
Ceiling platform
398
Floor Platform
Framing
New Joist
Direction Line
Original
Framing
Floor and
Ceiling Joists
are combined.
399
400
Displaying Framing
In Floor Plan View
Joists and rafters are represented in floor plan
view by CAD objects that are essentially
long, thin rectangles. Framing and trusses
can instead be represented by a single line by
checking Use line for framing on the Line
Properties panel of the Preferences
dialog. See Line Properties Panel on page
108.
In Cross Section/
Elevation Views
401
Framing
Editing Framing
If changes are made to a plan that affect
framing, select Build> Structure> Rebuild
Walls/Floors/Ceilings
, and then open
the Build Framing dialog to rebuild
affected areas of framing. For example, if a
window is moved or resized, wall framing
must be rebuilt. If the footprint is enlarged,
the wall framing and any roof or platform
framing that is affected must also be rebuilt.
Regenerating Framing
If you modify your plan, move walls, raise or
lower platforms or redesign the roof, you
402
1.
2.
for
more detail.
1.
2.
1.
edit button to
403
Framing
General Tab
5
6
1
7
2
3
404
view.
Materials Tab
For information about the Materials tab, see
Materials Tab on page 603.
Specification dialog.
General Tab
Materials Tab
405
Framing
4
1
2
3
406
down list. Choices include lumber, Ijoist, glulam, engineered lumber, lvl, steel-I
and steel box. Changing the type does not
affect how the post is placed. It does however
change how it appears in cross section, 3D
views, and Material List entries.
Note: If a concrete Type is specified, the post
will not appear as such in the materials list.
Instead, the amount of concrete required for
all concrete beams and posts will be listed.
The square footage required for beam forms,
and for post forms is also listed.
Chapter 15:
Trusses
Trusses
Chapter Overview
There are two basic ways to frame a roof.
The first is commonly called "stickframing",
or sometimes "handstacking" or "cut-andstack". This type of roof incorporates
framing such as rafters, ridges, and ceiling
joists. See Framing on page 377.
The other method is to use prefabricated,
engineered roof trusses. Chief Architect
allows you to design and display a wide
variety of trusses.
Disclaimer
Chief Architect does not engineer trusses.
The trusses displayed by Chief Architect are
for illustrative purposes only. They can show
how trusses will be used in your plan, and
help you communicate to the licensed
engineer who produces your final truss
design where you want your trusses and how
you would like them to work.
Chapter Contents
407
parent button
Roof Trusses
After roof and ceiling planes are
modeled, roof trusses can be built.
Select Build> Framing> Roof Truss
.
Roof trusses can be selected and opened for
specification. See Roof Truss Specification
Dialog on page 424.
Draw a truss as you would a CAD line,
dragging from the start of the truss to the
end. The first truss can be drawn over a gable
end wall or at the ridges end of a hipped
roof. The program will shape the truss so that
it fits properly between the roof and ceiling
planes. One or both ends of the truss may be
truncated if they come against existing roof
trusses. If a truss is drawn across another
truss, it will terminate exactly on the surface
of the existing truss, producing a girder truss.
408
Roof Trusses
Attic Trusses
Attic trusses, a useful variation of roof
trusses, can be drawn if a plan contains an
attic area to either side and above an upstairs
room, such as in a cape cod style home. The
following is a typical cross section view of a
building with attic trusses:
2.
409
Trusses
Deleting Trusses
Trusses of any kind can be individually or
multiply selected and deleted with the Delete
edit button, or by pressing the Delete
key on your keyboard.
Del
Copying Trusses
When a truss has been created and edited to
5.
2.
3.
4.
edit
Select the truss and use the Move handle to drag it perpendicularly. The
pointer becomes a four-headed arrow
when it is over the move handle.
6.
Moving Trusses
In Floor Plan View
Trusses can be moved just like rafters, joists,
or any other framing objects. When a truss or
framing object is selected, one of the handles
410
411
Trusses
to Framing Ref
in the Edit toolbar.
Truss Details
When you draw the first truss, the program
automatically creates a CAD detail named
Truss Detail. Open the Truss Detail by
selecting CAD> CAD Detail
selecting it from the list.
and
2.
3.
Truss Labels
Roof and attic trusses are labeled in floor
plan view in the format TR-xx. Floor and
ceiling trusses are labeled FTR-xx. The xx
follows the consecutive order in which each
distinct truss type or configuration was
created. For example, the first truss type
created will be labeled TR-1; the second will
be labeled TR-2; and so on. Truss labels also
appear in the Truss Detail and the Material
List.
A copied truss will have the same label as the
original if the conditions of the new location
412
Truss Base
A Truss Base defines the boundary
separating the tops of normal roof
trusses and valley fill roof trusses that lie
across and above them.
413
Trusses
Normal Trusses
414
Truss Base
2. Click here
Trusses
1.
3.
4.
415
6.
7.
tool.
416
8.
9.
Hip Trusses
Trusses
Hip Trusses
Hip roofs with various truss applications can
be modeled, including step down hip trusses;
sub-girder hip trusses; and drop hip or
417
Jack Trusses
Hip Trusses (4)
2.
3.
4.
Finally, draw a jack truss from the intersection to make sure it is properly positioned.
5.
Subgirder Hip
This illustration shows a Subgirder hip
system. Subgirders are the partial trusses that
butt into the doubled truss at the end of the
main run. In the following illustration, the
418
Trusses
Hip Trusses
Double Truss
Subgirder Trusses (11)
Subgirder Hip
2.
3.
4.
5.
419
Drop Hip
This illustration shows the Drop Hip, or
California Hip, system which uses the drop
hip trusses to support stick frame hip ridges
and common rafters. A couple of the drop
Common Rafters
420
3.
Girder Trusses
Subgirder Hip
The Drop Hip system eliminates the spacing
problems because the roof sheathing is nailed
to common rafters that pass over the drop hip
trusses. The disadvantage to this system is
that it requires the rafters in addition to the
trusses, and with a shallow pitch roof the
drop hip truss may not be deep enough to
give sufficient strength.
The first two methods normally require
blocking along the hip ridges. The third uses
a continuous hip ridge rafter as well as
common rafters that run over the drop hip
trusses. Blocking and rafters can be drawn in
manually, but are often supplied by the
automatic framing generator. See Mixing
Trusses with Stick Framing on page 413.
Girder Trusses
Trusses may not cross each other. If a newly
drawn truss ends near a truss crossing its
path, the system automatically extends it
until it butts into the existing truss.
421
Trusses
Advantages and
Disadvantages of
the Different Hip Systems
Scissors Trusses
Trusses drawn over sloping ceiling planes are
called Scissor trusses. Draw ceiling planes
as you would manual roof planes by
selecting Build> Roof> Ceiling Plane
422
General Tab
6
3
5
7
8
Trusses
423
Polyline Tab
Specification dialog.
General Tab
10
1
2
3
5
7
9
424
4
6
8
11
13
12
14
1
2
3
4
Kingpost
425
Trusses
Reduce Gable
End Truss
Lookouts
426
Materials Tab
For more information about the Materials
tab, see Materials Tab on page 603.
1
2
3
7
9
4
Floor trusses can be created whenever walls
define one or more rooms.
6
8
edit button.
427
Trusses
Materials Tab
For information about the Materials tab, see
Materials Tab on page 603.
428
Chapter 16:
Electrical
Electrical
Chapter Overview
The electrical plan shows the location of all
electrical objects such as lights, switches,
outlets, smoke detectors and vents. Basic
wiring diagrams show which objects share
circuits and the locations of the controlling
switches.
The display of electrical objects can be
controlled in 2D and 3D. Some electrical
symbols such as lights also affect rendering.
See Electrical on page 577.
Usually, the electrical plan is one of the last
additions to a plan since the positioning of
most electrical objects is determined by the
location of walls, cabinets and other objects.
Building requirements vary throughout
the country and around the world. It is
your responsibility to comply with your local
codes.
Chapter Contents
429
tool is
Outlets
The 110V Outlet
child button
places 110V duplex outlets in walls or
on the floor. The 220V Outlet
child
button places 220V outlets. Outlet type and
height are controlled by the outlet height in
the Electrical Defaults dialog.
Outlet locations are measured from their
centers. Individual outlet heights can be
specified in the Electrical Service
Specification dialog.
Certain room types and situations cause a
different types of outlet to be placed instead.
To take advantage of the programs
capabilities, be sure that rooms are properly
defined before placing electrical objects. See
Room Specification on page 191.
430
Lights
Lights
Switches
The Switch
child tool places wall
switches as specified in the
Electrical Defaults dialog. Like outlets,
the height of switches is measured from the
floor to the center of the object and is set in
the Electrical Defaults dialog, along with
default switch type. See Electrical Defaults
on page 441.
If you connect 2 or more switches in a
circuit, they update to 3-way or 4-way
switches automatically.
Floor Plan
View
3D view
431
Electrical
The Light
child tool places lights
as specified in the Electrical
Defaults dialog. Depending on where you
click in floor plan view, the light may be
mounted on the ceiling or on a wall. All
lights placed in a plan also serve as light
sources in render and raytrace views.
Connect Electrical
The Connect Electrical child tool is
used to illustrate circuits, showing
which lights and outlets are attached to
any given switch, for example.
To create a new circuit or to add to an
existing circuit, press the left mouse button
on one electrical object while using Connect
Del
Connect Electrical
tool. Sometimes
additional connections are desired, however.
Before adding extra connections:
1.
2.
3.
mode
using the Arc
tool. Place these
connections on the same layer as the regular
electrical connections.
More than one switch can control an object
or group of objects. Two switches controlling
the same objects are referred to as three-way
switches. Three switches controlling the
432
Electrical
tool can be modified. Click
anywhere along a connection arc to display
two handles and reshape it. Drag from the
middle handle to change the curvature of the
arc. Drag from the other handle to create an
S-curve with one portion more tightly curved
than the other. The middle handle can be
dragged along the arc to make one of its
portions longer than the other.
tool or by selecting
edit button or
Electrical
tool; drag to the next object;
and release. Remove an electrical object
from a circuit by clicking on it with the
Connect Electrical
tool in CAD
Electrical Library
Place Outlets
so that outlets are placed
appropriately in each room type.
Place Outlets
is used in a room defined
by railings or invisible walls, outlets will be
automatically placed in all adjacent rooms
that share these wall types with that room.
: If Auto
Electrical Library
The Electrical Library
button
accesses a library full of various
electrical symbols. The Electrical library
category is divided into numerous
subcategories.
Browse for electrical objects such as bath
vent fans; an electrical panel; fluorescent
433
Electrical
Object
edit button or Tab key until
the desired electrical object is selected.
434
By Dragging
Select an electrical object. Then grab the
square handle when the pointer changes to a
Move pointer, and drag the electrical
object to the new position.
By Using Dimensions
To dimension to electrical objects, first
specify that electrical objects be located
using dimensions on the Locate Objects tab
of the Dimension Defaults dialog. Click
in the check box to have electrical objects be
located by manual dimensions.
Make sure that dimensions are actually
locating the correct objects before using the
dimension to manipulate the electrical
object. If needed, for example by adjusting
the dimension by moving the extension from
the outside to the inside of the wall.
Once dimensions are set to locate electrical
objects, drag a dimension line through the
Object
edit button. See Transform/
Replicate Object on page 793.
435
Electrical
Symbol Editing
The underlying 3D symbol data, CAD block,
and other properties of an electrical symbol
can be modified in the Open Symbol
dialog. To access the dialog, select the
electrical object and click the Open Symbol
Transform/Replicate Object
edit
button. See Transform/Replicate Object on
page 793.
436
edit button;
Add to Library
Edit Components
Components
edit button. See Editing
Columns on page 944.
dialog.
The Electrical Service Specification
dialog consists of four tabs:
The Service Data tab specifies the location of individual electrical objects.
437
Electrical
1
2
3
438
1
2
3
4
Electrical
5
11
6
7
8
9
10
13
12
14
15
439
440
Electrical Defaults
Layer Tab
For information about the Layer tab, see
Layer Tab on page 123.
Materials Tab
For information about the Materials tab, see
Materials Tab on page 603.
Electrical Defaults
Default Settings for electrical objects
can be accessed by selecting Edit>
Default Settings from the menu or by
441
Electrical
3
5
2
4
6
442
Chapter 17:
Chapter Overview
Chapter Contents
Corner Boards
Corner Board Specification Dialog
Quoins
Quoin Specification Dialog
Molding Polylines
Frieze Moldings
Displaying Molding Polylines
Changing Profiles on Existing Moldings
Molding Polyline Specification Dialog
3D Molding Polyline Specification Dialog
Corner Boards
Corner boards are added to a building
exterior by selecting Build> Trim> Corner
Boards
while in floor plan or a 3D view.
They are also available on the toolbar by first
selecting the Trim Tools
parent button
443
Trim
1
2
3
4
444
5
6
Quoins
Layer Tab
For information about the Layer tab, see
Layer Tab on page 123.
Materials Tab
For information about the Materials tab, see
Materials Tab on page 603.
Trim
Quoins
Quoins are added the same way as corner
boards. In floor plan or a 3D view, select
Build> Trim> Quoins
and click outside
the corner where you want to place quoins.
While they are created the same way as
corner boards, quoins can be distinguished
by their larger size in floor plan view.
A selected quoin or quoins cannot be
dragged or otherwise moved; but you can
delete it by pressing the Del key; or edit it by
Resizing Quoins
You can change the top and/or bottom height
of a quoin by selecting it in a 3D view and
moving the appropriate vertical handle;
however, it is more accurate to enter the
desired values in the Quoin Specification
dialog.
445
1
2
3
4
446
10
Molding Polylines
Staggered
Mirrored
Uniform
Layer Tab
Materials Tab
tool.
tool.
tool.
tool.
447
Trim
Molding Polylines
Cross Section/
Elevation View
(selected)
Molding polyline and molding line in
Floor Plan View and 3D overview
448
3D Overview
Frieze Moldings
Trim
Frieze Moldings
Frieze moldings and frieze boards can be
created automatically through the Frieze tab
of the Build Roof dialog. See Frieze Tab
on page 325. Frieze moldings are 3D
molding polylines that are generated with
automatic roofs.
449
450
In 3D Views
Click the Display Options
button to
open the Layer Display Options dialog.
This dialog allows moldings and other
objects to be turned on and off by layer. See
Layer Display Options Dialog on page
119.
General Tab
Polyline Tab
For information about the Polyline tab, see
Polyline Tab on page 741.
Arc Tab
451
Trim
Moldings Tab
1
2
3
height.
452
Materials Tab
For information about the Materials tab, see
Materials Tab on page 603.
General Tab
453
Trim
2
6
3
7
4
454
Moldings Tab
For information about the Moldings tab, see
Moldings Tab on page 452.
Materials Tab
For information about the Materials tab, see
Materials Tab on page 603.
Trim
455
456
Chapter 18:
Cabinets
Chapter Overview
Chapter Contents
Cabinet Defaults
The Cabinet Tools
Selecting Cabinets
Displaying Cabinets
Cabinet Labels
Deleting Cabinets
Copying Cabinets
Moving Cabinets
Rotating Cabinets
Resizing Cabinets
Editing Cabinets
Editing the Cabinet Door/Drawer Style
Editing Custom Countertops
Attaching Cabinets
Special Cabinets
Cabinet Specification Dialog
Custom Countertop Specification Dialog
Cabinet Defaults Setup
457
Cabinets
Cabinet Defaults
Default Settings for each cabinet type
can be accessed by selecting Edit>
Default Settings from the menu.
Each type of cabinet has a default definition
for height, width, depth, distance from floor,
etc. General cabinet settings, as well as the
default settings for Base Cabinets, Wall
Cabinets, Full Height Cabinets, Shelves, and
Partitions, are defined here. Open the
, Wall Cabinet
, or Full Height
cabinet mode. A
corner cabinet will remain a corner cabinet
when it is moved, edited or copied.
Base Cabinets
Clicking the Cabinet Tools
parent
button automatically selects the Base
Cabinet
child button. Click near a wall
in any view to attach the cabinet to it. Base
cabinets generate a countertop and toe kick
by default.
Wall Cabinets
To place a wall cabinet, select the Wall
Cabinet
child button and click
near a wall in any view. Click directly over a
base cabinet to place a wall cabinet above it.
The base cabinet will not interfere with the
placement.
Soffits
Soffits typically fill the space between
cabinet tops and the ceiling. Soffits
can also be used to create any object than can
be modeled as a 3D box. To place a soffit,
458
Shelves
Select the Shelf
button and click in
any view to create a shelf based on
default settings. Once created, shelves can be
modified. Select a shelf and click the Open
edit button to display the Shelf
Specification dialog and specify its
Object
Partitions
Select the Partition
button and
click in floor plan view to create a
vertical partition. Once created, partitions
can be modified. Select the partition and
click the Open Object
edit button to
open the Partition Specification dialog
and specify the partitions dimensions,
position, and material. Partitions can be used
with shelves to create complex storage
systems.
Custom Countertops
Choose Build> Cabinet> Custom
Countertop or click the Custom
Countertop
child button to create a
custom countertop. Click in floor plan view
and drag a rectangle from one corner to the
opposite corner. The rectangle is a closed
polyline defined as a countertop. You can
continue creating custom countertops until a
different tool is selected.
Cabinets generate their own countertop as
defined in the Cabinet Specification
dialog. When a custom countertop covers
any portion of a base cabinet, it will override
the default countertop.
The countertop takes its thickness and height
from the base cabinet below. If there is no
base cabinet below, the custom countertop
will take its thickness from the base cabinet
defaults. The countertop initially takes its
material from the default base cabinet. You
may define the height, position, and material
in the Countertop Specification dialog.
See Editing Custom Countertops on page
469.
459
Cabinets
Cabinet Library
Click the Cabinet Library
button
to access a library of cabinets. Select
the desired library object and click OK.
Click to place a cabinet. Once placed, library
cabinets can be edited. Select the cabinet and
click the Open Object
460
Built-In Appliances
Appliances and fixtures can be found in the
Library Browser in the Interior Fixtures
library. Some appliances, such as
refrigerators, can be placed directly into a
plan as stand-alone symbols. Many kitchen
appliances, such as sinks, dishwashers, and
garbage disposals, must be placed into an
existing cabinet. See Interior Fixtures on
page 578.
Place range tops and sinks into cabinets early, so that any resizing can be
done before too many cabinets are placed.
Electrical Objects
Electrical objects such as switches and
outlets can be placed on cabinets in most
views. See The Electrical Tools on page
430.
Selecting Cabinets
Selecting Cabinets
Right-Click
You can right-click on a cabinet while using
any tool to select it. You do not need to
change tools before selecting a cabinet or any
other object with a right-click.
Using a right-click, you can at first select an
adjacent object and may need to click the
Select Next Object
edit button or press
the Tab key until the proper cabinet is
selected. The right-click may be used in any
3D view as well. Once selected with this
method you can use the contextual menu to
open it for specification.
Cabinet Handles
Select a cabinet and notice the various edit
handles that display. Each handle has a
specific purpose. Handles on corner cabinets
display differently than other cabinets.
Triangular handle at back
rotates the cabinet.
Side handle(s) change the
cabinet width.
Center handle moves the
cabinet.
Front handle (with v)
changes the cabinet depth
and indicates cabinet front.
461
Cabinets
Open Object
edit tool will display only
if cabinets of the same type are selected.
If the Soffit
tool is active, only soffits
can be selected.
If the Shelf
tool is active, only
shelves can selected.
If the Partition
tool is active, only
partitions can be selected.
Selection Restrictions
Cabinets cannot be selected in CAD mode.
Click the CAD Toggle
button, F2 , or
choose CAD> CAD Mode Off to return to
the Architectural mode and select cabinets.
Displaying Cabinets
Cabinets can be placed in all views, and are
visible in all views.
462
In 3D Views
Click the Display Options
button to
open the Layer Display Options dialog
and turn off the display of cabinets. See
Displaying Objects on page 125.
Cabinet Labels
Displaying Cabinet
Module Lines
When cabinets merge, the delineation line
between cabinet sections disappears in floor
{ B [D | S] | U [D] | W} [L | R]
B: base U: utility (full height) W: wall
D: door(s) S: sink L: left R: right
463
Cabinets
Cabinet Labels
4.
[ OV | RF ] [G]
Deleting Cabinets
Select the cabinet(s) and press the
the keyboard or click the Delete
button on the toolbar.
Del
key on
edit
Copying Cabinets
In Plan View
copy pointer
will appear. Click to place
a copy of the selected cabinet(s).
edit button.
464
Copying Groups
Stacked cabinet combinations, created with a
row of base cabinets, wall cabinets and full
height cabinets, may be copied as a group. In
Full Height mode, drag a marquee to select
them in floor plan view. When the selection
set is complete, click the Copy
edit
button. The copy pointer
will appear.
Then move to another location in the same
plan, or even in a different plan, choose
Edit> Paste, then click in floor plan view to
place a copy of the group of cabinets.
Moving Cabinets
In 3D Views
To make copies in any 3D view, select the
cabinet or group of cabinets in any 3D view
using the Shift + click method. Click the
Copy
edit button then click and drag
from the center handle of the cabinet or
group to create the copy and release the
button; or, click in the view.
Multiple Copies
To create multiple copies of the same
object(s), double-click the Copy
edit
button when the selection set is complete;
then click in the plan to place a copy.
Multiple copy requires that the receiving
plan be open so that you can toggle to it by
clicking on-screen. If using multiple copy
across plans, open both plans first and select
or Win-
Architectural Blocks
Cabinets can be blocked together as an
architectural block, saved to the library, and
used in other plans. See Creating
Architectural Blocks on page 556.
In 3D Views
When moving a cabinet in 3D views,
movement stops when another object (such
as a cabinet, soffit, wall, ceiling or floor) is
hit. You can force movement through another
object by holding down the Ctrl key and then
making the move. It is possible to move one
cabinet over another object when the Ctrl key
is held.
Base cabinets, wall cabinets, and full height
cabinets cannot be moved down through the
floor in a cross section/elevation view, even
using the Ctrl key. Soffits and shelves may be
moved through the floor if the Ctrl key is
used.
465
Cabinets
Moving Cabinets
Move Restrictions
Rotating Cabinets
When a cabinet is selected, five handles or
grips appear. Grab the triangular handle at
the back of the cabinet and drag it to rotate
the cabinet. To rotate multiple cabinets
selected as a group, drag from the triangular
handle that displays when the cabinets are
group selected.
Cabinets will rotate in either 15 degree or 7
degree increments, or at any allowed angle
defined in the Plan Defaults dialog. See
Plan Defaults on page 91.
Resizing Cabinets
Individual cabinets can be resized using the
edit handles; by typing new values into the
Cabinet Specification dialog; or by using
466
edit
Editing Cabinets
By Dragging
In floor plan view, select the cabinet to resize.
Temporary dimension numbers will display and will change according to the
resize increment set in the Cabinet
Defaults dialog as the size is changed.
form/Replicate Object
edit button.
Select a cabinet or group of cabinets and
click the Transform/Replicate Object
edit button. The Transform/Replicate
Object dialog will appear. See Transform/
Replicate Object on page 793.
Corner Cabinets
To resize a corner cabinet, select it. Then drag
from the side handle to increase the overall size
of the cabinet without increasing the depth
where it joins to other cabinets. Drag from the
front handle to change the cabinet depth.
Multiple Cabinets
When cabinets are selected as a group they
can be modified as a group in the Cabinet
Specification dialog. Any specifications
that the selected objects share in common
can be edited when the group is selected.
When you group select cabinets of different
types, some options will be unavailable in
the Cabinet Specification dialog. For
example, you will not be able to redefine the
In a 3D View
Cabinets can be resized in 3D views using
their edit handles. Temporary dimensions
467
Cabinets
Editing Cabinets
Reflect Tools
A cabinet or group of cabinets can be
reflected by one of two methods:
Symbol Editing
The Open Symbol tool is only available for
cabinets that contain library symbols such as
sinks, cooktops, or dishwashers. To use the
Open Symbol tool, select the object and
468
Add to Library
Cabinets can be saved in the Library
Browser. Select the cabinet and click the
Add to Library
edit button. The Add to
Library dialog will display, allowing you to
add the cabinet or cabinet components to
specific libraries under Cabinet Modules,
Cabinet Doors and Drawers, or the
Fixtures (Interior) category. If you choose a
library under the Cabinet Doors and
Drawers category, only the cabinet door will
be saved. If the library is from the Cabinet
Modules category, the cabinet will be saved
along with the cabinet door and any drop-in
appliance. If the cabinet contains a drop-in
appliance, the Fixtures (Interior) category
will be available. If a library from this
category is chosen, only the drop-in
appliance will be saved to the libray. For
more information see Adding to the
Library on page 568.
Edit Components
You can view and/or modify the Material
List record for a cabinet or group of cabinets
through the Components dialog. To open
the dialog, select the cabinet and click the
Components
edit button. For detailed
information about the specific fields and uses
of the component list, see The Components
Dialog on page 948.
edit
tool.
469
Cabinets
Use Chamfer
the corners.
or Fillet
tools on
3.
4.
, Polyline Inter-
section
, and Polyline Subtract
edit buttons to create or modify countertops using multiple custom countertops.
See Editing Polylines on page 771.
The following illustrates the use of a custom
countertop to fill in a corner behind an
angled sink.
1.
2.
Arc
edit button.
Cabinet
modules (3)
Custom countertop
470
and Custom
Counter Holes
can be added to the
Architectural Blocks library category for
simplified control and management. See
Creating Architectural Blocks on page
556.
Attaching Cabinets
Attaching Cabinets
Merged cabinets show a gap in the
Cabinet Module line.
Kitchen Island
To form a kitchen island, attach several
cabinets back-to-back as well as side-to-side.
Match the widths so that each cabinet back or
side meets the back or side of only one other
cabinet. If this is not done, the lines
separating the cabinets cannot be suppressed.
471
Cabinets
Special Cabinets
There are several special cabinet shapes
which can be specified. Certain requirements
must be met before some special cabinet
types can be specified.
Normal Cabinets
Select the Cabinet Tools
You can specify a Diagonal Door on corner cabinets to create an angled corner
cabinet. See Front Tab on page 478.
parent button,
Corner Cabinets
Open a cabinet for specification and select
Corner Cabinet from the Special drop-down
list to create a corner cabinet.
472
Special Cabinets
End Cabinets
Left
Radius
End
Right
Radius
End
Cabinets
473
Blind Cabinets
Fillers
Chief Architect models a continuous
countertop and fillers if two cabinets meeting
474
Specification dialog.
General Tab
1
3
2
4
Cabinets
8
9
475
476
477
Cabinets
Front Tab
The appearance of the cabinet front is
specified on the Front tab. Most settings can
478
Inset Doors may be selected for all cabinets. This option will make all door and
drawer faces flush with the cabinet face
instead of overlaying it.
Glass Doors may be defined for any cabinet that doesnt use a library door. When
selected, the door panel will be created
479
Cabinets
If Diagonal Door is checked in the Cabinet Defaults dialog, corner cabinets will
have a diagonal door by default.
480
Fill Tab
1
2
481
Cabinets
Hardware Tab
482
Cabinets
483
Moldings Tab
484
1
3
2
4
Layer Tab
For information about the Layer tab, see
Layer Tab on page 123.
Materials Tab
For information about the Materials tab, see
Materials Tab on page 603.
Label Tab
An objects display in floor plan view if
Show Labels is selected on the Label tab of
the Schedule Specification dialog for that
General Tab
For more information about the General tab,
see General Tab on page 544.
485
Cabinets
Fill Tab
For information about the Fill tab, see Fill
Tab on page 481.
Materials Tab
For information about the Materials tab, see
Materials Tab on page 603.
Layer Tab
For information about using the Layer tab,
see Layer Tab on page 123.
dialog.
General Tab
Polyline Tab
For information about the Polyline tab, see
Polyline Tab on page 741.
Moldings Tab
For information about the Moldings tab, see
Moldings Tab on page 452.
Materials Tab
For information about the Materials tab, see
Materials Tab on page 603.
486
487
Cabinets
488
Chapter 19:
Terrain
Chapter Contents
489
Terrain
Chapter Overview
Terrain Tools
Plant Tools
Sprinkler Tools
Road Tools
Terrain Tools
There are many tools available for creating
terrain. All tools are accessible through the
Terrain menu. If you need to add any of the
parent buttons to your toolbar, use the
Toolbar Customization dialog. See
Adding Toolbar Buttons on page 18.
Click the Terrain Tools parent button
to display its child buttons to the right.
Click the Terrain Perimeter child
button to create a terrain perimeter.
Terrain Perimeter
490
button.
, Elevation Line
, Elevation Region
Elevation Points
Elevation Points
contain absolute
elevation data for one location. Chief
Architect requires many points to make an
accurate approximation of your site. They
491
Terrain
120"
Terrain
child button. Chief Architect
gathers the elevation data provided; fills in
the gaps where elevation data has not been
provided; and generates contour lines. See
Building the Terrain on page 500.
0"
Elevation Lines before terrain generation
Elevation Lines
An Elevation Line contains absolute
elevation data for many points at a
492
Elevation Splines
Elevation Splines can be used to form
complex curves and shapes. Like
elevation lines, elevation splines contain
absolute elevation data for many points along
a constant elevation.
To place an elevation spline, click the
Elevation Spline
child button and click
and drag multiple sections in floor plan view.
Elevation splines are initially placed at
elevation 0' - 0"and must be opened and
assigned an elevation.
60"
Elevation Regions
An Elevation Region contains
absolute elevation data for an enclosed
region and is ideal for creating a flat surface
for your building site. Avoid specifing any
other elevation data within an elevation
region.
0"
Elevation splines before terrain generation
Elevation Region
child button then click
and drag a rectangular polyline in floor plan
view. Once the elevation region is drawn, it
must be opened and assigned an elevation
value. Elevation regions are created just like
rectangular polylines. See Rectangular
Polylines on page 745.
493
Terrain
Terrain Breaks
240"
120"
0"
Elevation lines used to create a terrain grade,
elevation region used to create building pad.
If the terrain break does not extend completely from one side of the terrain perimeter to the other, the areas near each end
of the terrain break will be blended.
240"
120"
494
Elev. Line
(240")
Raised Region
, Lowered Region
Hill
, Valley
, and Flat Region
child buttons. These tools allow you to
modify the existing elevation data by
drawing a closed polyline. Their height is
relative to the terrain surface generated from
the elevation data provided in your plan.
To add a terrain modifier to your plan, click
one of the child buttons and click and drag a
closed polyline in floor plan view. The
polyline can then be selected and edited in a
variety of ways. See Editing Terrain
Features on page 503.
Hill
Elevation
Region (120")
Flat
Region
Elev. Line
(0")
Raised
Region
Valley
Lowered Region
495
Terrain
Lowered Region
creates a depression
and
Valley
tools create similar terrain shapes
which come to a point instead of flattening at
their highest or lowest elevations. A Flat
Render Full Overview after terrain generation
A Raised Region
creates a raised area
which is flat on the top, like a plateau, and a
Region
will adjust to the surrounding
terrain to maintain a flat elevation.
Terrain modifiers can be blocked with
images and stored in the library for
future use. See Creating Architectural
Blocks on page 556.
; Feature Spline
; Feature Closed
496
, Feature Splines
A Terrain Hole
is a region that cuts a
hole in the terrain. Using this tool is the same
as creating a terrain feature and checking
"make hole" in the Terrain Feature
Specification dialog. See Terrain Feature
Specification Dialog on page 519.
The Terrain Hole
tool is useful for
manually clipping the terrain around a
foundation that does not match the footprint
of the first floor. For more information on
clipping, see General Tab on page 512.
Terrain features in floor plan view
Terrain
497
Plant Tools
Click the Plant Tools parent button to
display its child buttons to the right.
Click the Plant Chooser
child button to
Open the Plant Chooser dialog. See Plant
Chooser Dialog on page 507.
Click the Plant Library
child button to
open the Library Browser to the Plant
category. See Plants on page 581
Click the Create Plant Image
child
button to create a plant image. See Plant
Image Specification Dialog on page 503.
Once a plant image is created, it can be
added to the library for future use. See
Adding to the Library on page 568.
Click the Grow All Plants
child button
to open the Grow Plants dialog.
Sprinkler Tools
Click the Sprinkler Tools parent
button to display its child buttons.
Click the Sprinkler Head
child button
to select a sprinkler from the Library
Browser. Sprinklers can be selected and
opened for specification. See Sprinkler
Specification Dialog on page 521.
Click the Sprinkler Line
child button to
draw sprinkler lines in your plan. Sprinkler
lines are drawn and edited just like CAD
lines. See Line Tools on page 727.
Click the Sprinkler Spline
child button
to draw sprinkler splines in your plan.
498
Hardiness Zones
Hardiness Zones
Select Terrain> Plant> Show Hardiness
Zones...
Hardiness Zone Maps. Click the dropdown list to select different regions.
499
Terrain
child button.
500
Sun Shadows
Sun shadows are computed based on the
contour of the terrain. If a terrain perimeter
exists, the sun shadow adjusts to the terrain.
edit button.
Copying Terrain
2.
3.
1.
edit button.
.
501
Terrain
deletes all
Terrain> Clear Terrain
components required to model the terrain
including the generated 2D contours.
Elevation Points
Select an elevation point in floor plan view
and place the pointer over the center handle.
502
Terrain Breaks
Terrain Breaks
are edited like lines and
splines in CAD mode. See Editing Lines
on page 766.
Terrain Modifiers
The shape of a Raised Region
Region
; Hill
; Valley
Region
can be edited like a normal
polyline. See Polylines on page 741.
Terrain objects created with the Terrain
Modifier
tools can also be edited by
selecting them and clicking the Open Object
edit button to open them for
specification. The Raised / Lowered
Region Specification; the Hill / Valley
Specification; and the Flat Region
Specification dialogs contain area
information for the polyline and control the
selected terrain objects relative height and
how it displays in floor plan view. See Hill /
Valley Specification Dialog on page 519.
; Lowered
; or Flat
503
Terrain
Image Tab
1
2
3
5
504
2
3
4
Terrain
505
1
2
3
4
506
Layer Tab
For information about the Layer tab, see
Layer Tab on page 123.
Terrain
507
508
2
3
4
Terrain
509
3
4
5
510
button.
tool.
511
Terrain
General Tab
2
5
512
Terrain
513
Contours Tab
3
4
514
Polyline Tab
For information about the Polyline tab, see
Polyline Tab on page 741.
Materials Tab
Use this tab to select materials to apply to the
terrain surface and terrain skirt in 3D views.
These materials are not calculated in the
Material List. See Materials Tab on page
603.
tool.
Terrain
515
General Tab
2
3
516
Elevation - Enter the height of the elevation point. The default unit for this value
is inches or mm.
X Coordinate - Enter the x coordinate of
the elevation point.
Attributes Tab
1
2
3
4
517
Terrain
tool.
Elevation Tab
Polyline Tab
For information about the Polyline tab, see
Polyline Tab on page 741.
1
3
518
Polyline Tab
For information about the Polyline tab, see
Polyline Tab on page 741.
519
Terrain
General Tab
1
2
Polyline Tab
Materials Tab
For information about the Materials tab, see
Materials Tab on page 603.
520
Specification dialog.
General Tab
Terrain
521
Options Tab
1
2
Fill Tab
For information about the Fill tab, see Fill
Tab on page 481.
522
Layer Tab
For information about the Layer tab, see
Layer Tab on page 123.
Materials Tab
Label Tab
For information about the Label tab, see
Label Tab on page 562.
Text Files
Text files contain elevation terrain data based
on x, y, and z coordinates where x and y
define the location of a point on a Cartesian
grid, and z defines the elevation for that
point. Each point must be on a separate line
of the text file. Importable text files can
DXF/DWG Files
If you have a model of your terrain created
on another program that contains contour
lines and elevation data, that information can
be imported directly as elevation data into
Chief Architect as a .dxf or a .dwg file. See
Importing DXF/DWG Elevation Data on
page 527.
Terrain
523
Select File
1
2
2 Select the Organization of the Data You need to know how the data in your
text file is organized. Each data point contains information about its X-axis (East to
West location), Y-axis (North to South
location), and Z-axis (elevation). It might
also contain a brief description.
Elevation information can come in one of six
different sequences, and will either be
separated by a comma (comma delimited) or
a space (space delimited).
XYZ - Information in this format will begin
with the X coordinate, followed by the Y
coordinate and the Z coordinate.
#XYZ - Information in this format begins
with a number that belongs to each data point
524
Filter Data
1
2
3
525
Terrain
Scale Data
1
2
3
4
5
526
Drawing Wizard.
2.
3.
527
Terrain
Polyline dialog.
Convert Polyline
1
528
Chapter 20:
Chapter Overview
Roads and sidewalks can be created in Chief
Architect using the road tools. Roads and
sidewalks are modeled in 3D like other
terrain objects. Because they have much in
common with terrain objects and rely upon
terrain data to be viewed in 3D, you should
be familiar with terrain modeling before
using the road tools. See Terrain on page
489.
Chapter Contents
parent
529
Roads
Roads
A road is a line that can be used to
model roads on your building site.
Roads created with the Road
tool have a
consistent width that can be defined in the
Road Specification dialog.
The elevation of a road is flat along its width,
which makes it an ideal tool for creating
roads on terrain with relief.
530
Road Polyline
A road polyline can be used to model
roads of any shape. It is ideal for
creating parking lots and other non-linear
Median
A median is a polyline that can be used
within a road. The median will be
made of the same material as the terrain
beneath it and will have a curb if the road
that encompasses it has one.
Driveway
A driveway is a road without a curb. A
driveway will cut out a curb wherever
it meets a road or a road polyline. Like a
road, the elevation of a driveway is flat
across its width.
To place a driveway select Terrain> Road>
Driveway
from the menu and click and
drag to draw a line in floor plan view.
Multiple driveway sections can be connected
together.
Driveways are edited like CAD lines. See
Line Tools on page 727.
Cul-de-sac
A Cul-de-sac is a road polyline in a
predetermined shape. A cul-de-sac
follows the surface of the terrain beneath it.
To place a cul-de-sac select Terrain> Road>
Cul-de-sac
from the menu and click on a
road end where you want the cul-de-sac to
appear. Culs-de-sac cannot be placed on road
polylines.
Median
from the menu and click and
drag to draw a rectangular polyline in floor
plan view. Road median polylines must be
contained within a road.
Road Stripe
A Road Stripe allows you to paint lines
on a road surface.
531
Roads
Road Marking
A Road Marking paints polylines on a
road surface, allowing any shape to be
created.
To place a road marking select Terrain>
Road> Road Marking
from the menu
and click and drag to draw a rectangular
polyline within a road in floor plan view.
Sidewalk
A sidewalk is a line that can be used to
model sidewalks on a building site.
Sidewalks have a consistent width that can
be defined in the Sidewalk Specification
532
Sidewalk Polyline
In 3D Views
Roads and sidewalks display in 3D views
whenever the terrain is displayed.
Roads and sidewalks create additional
surfaces that affect the amount of time
required to generate 3D views.
By default, terrain rebuilds automatically
when road objects are added, removed or
edited. If it does not, select Terrain> Build
Terrain
533
Roads
Delete
edit button to remove them from
your plan.
Medians
534
Object
edit button will open the Road
Specification dialog. The General tab will
not appear for medians. See The Road
Specification Dialog on page 536.
Driveways
Driveways are edited along their centerline,
just like standard lines. See Line Tools on
page 727.
The Driveway Specification dialog
allows you to control the dimensions of the
driveway and other properties that affect its
display in 2D and 3D views. See Driveway
Specification Dialog on page 538.
Cul-de-sac
Select the perimeter of the cul-de-sac for
editing. Culs-de-sac are edited just like
standard polylines in CAD mode. For more,
see Polylines on page 741.
The Road Specification dialog allows
you to control the properties that affect how
the cul-de-sac displays in 2D and 3D views.
See The Road Specification Dialog on
page 536.
Sidewalk
Road Polyline
or a Sidewalk Polyline
Automatically
Generate Sidewalks
Select a Road
, Road Polyline
Cul-de-sac
, or Median
and
click the the Automatically Generate
Sidewalks
Sidewalks &
Sidewalk Polylines
Convert to Polyline
Road/Sidewalk
1
2
3
1 Left/Right Side of Road - Check one
Roads
535
General Tab
1
2
3
536
Curb Tab
1
2
3
4
on page 743.
Materials Tab
Use this tab to select a material to apply to
the road in 3D views. This material is not
calculated in the Material List.
The Materials tab of the Road
Specification dialog is the same as the
Materials tab on many other specification
dialogs. See Materials Tab on page 603.
Roads
537
General Tab
1
2
3
driveway.
on page 743.
538
Materials Tab
General Tab
Object
Polyline Tab
For information about the Polyline Tab, see
Polyline Tab on page 741.
Materials Tab
Use this tab to select a material to apply to
the Road Marking in 3D views. This material
is not calculated in the Material List.
For information about the Materials Tab, see
Materials Tab on page 603.
edit
Roads
Select a Sidewalk
539
General Tab
1
2
3
Materials Tab
Polyline Tab
For information about using the Polyline
Tab, see Polyline Tab on page 741.
540
Other Objects
Chapter Overview
Chief Architect has many additional objects
that can be used to customize your design.
Chapter Contents
Soffits
Special Applications for Soffits
Rules for Calculating Materials on Soffits
Soffits
Soffits typically fill the space between
cabinet tops and the ceiling. Soffits are
very versatile, however, and can be used to
create any other object that can be modeled
as a 3D box.
Maximum soffit width is 135 feet (32m).
Minimum width is 1/16" (1 mm).
Soffit Defaults
The default size for soffits cannot be
changed. Soffits are sized to be the same
width as and 1" (20mm) deeper than the
default wall cabinet. Its height automatically
adjusts to fill the space between the ceiling
and the top of the wall cabinets.
The General Cabinet Defaults apply to
soffits, allowing you to set the Minimum
Cabinet Width and the Width Increment
that soffits snap to. The Width Increment is
541
Other
Objects
Chapter 21:
Placing Soffits
Soffits appear in both 2D and 3D views.
They can be assigned materials that are
calculated in the Material List; but by default
they use the material assigned to the default
wall. Like cabinets, soffits can have custom
molding profiles specified for them. See
Moldings Tab on page 484.
Brick Veneer
On exterior walls, create a brick veneer that
extends only halfway up the wall using four
inch (100mm) deep soffits placed around the
base of the house.
Tile Surrounds
A material such as ceramic tile can be
assigned to a soffit applied to the walls above
tubs or shower stalls.
542
Non-Rotating Images
Chief Architect comes with many bitmap
images which are useful in a variety of
543
Other
Objects
edit
General Tab
1
3
5
2
6
7
1 Height - Define the vertical height of
544
Other
Objects
Options Tab
1
3
Moldings Tab
545
Layer Tab
Label Tab
Materials Tab
Use this tab to select a material to apply to
the soffit surface in 3D views. If a material is
Sloped Soffits
When a soffit is turned into a sloped soffit
the General and Options tabs of the Soffit
Specification dialog change. The picture
Elevation View
Front
Three diagrams have been inset to show how
the dialog relates to the sloped soffits.
Thickness is measured perpendicular to the
slope of the soffit.
Width is measure left to right across the
soffit.
546
Polyline Solids
In 3D views, polyline solids generate
polyline shaped objects with a specified
thickness. They can be either horizontal or
vertical. They are useful for creating custom
details anywhere in your 3D model.
edit
547
Other
Objects
Polyline Solids
In 3D Views
Select Tools> Display Options
to open
the Layer Display Options dialog. This
dialog allows polyline solids and other
objects to be turned on and off by layer. See
Displaying Objects on page 125.
2.
General Tab
Polyline Tab
For information about the Polyline tab, see
Polyline Tab on page 741.
1
2
3
1 Hole in Polyline Solid - Select to
Materials Tab
For information about the Materials tab, see
Materials Tab on page 603.
548
Fireplaces
Other
Objects
Fireplaces
A masonry fireplace can be placed in or
away from a wall by selecting Build> Fireplace
Freestanding
To place a masonry fireplace in an open area,
select Build> Fireplace
wall.
and click on a
Unlike fireplaces placed in walls, freestanding fireplace have five handles when
selected, and may be rotated, resized, or
moved in any direction.
Select the fireplace to display three edit
handles located along the wall.
549
Fireplace Foundations
If a fireplace is added on the first floor before
building the foundation plan, a foundation
will be generated under the fireplace when
the foundation is built. The fireplace
foundation will be of the same material type
as the original fireplace, but it will not have a
fire box or a hearth. This fireplace
foundation may be edited or deleted, as
desired. A fire box and hearth may be added
from the specification dialog.
Moving a Fireplace
Drag from the center handle to move the
fireplace. If the fireplace is in a wall, you are
limited to moving the fireplace along that
wall, or in and out, stopping when either its
back or front is flush with the wall. If the
fireplace is freestanding, it will move
perpendicular to its sides unless you hold
Resizing a Fireplace
To change the width of a fireplace and its fire
box, start at a side handle and drag along the
wall away from or toward the center of the
fireplace. Note that the fire box also resizes if
this method is used. It is more accurate to
enter the desired values for the fireplace in
the Fireplace Specification dialog.
Displaying Fireplaces
The color and display of fireplaces in floor
plan view is controlled by the manual
dimension layer. See Displaying Objects
on page 125.
550
Other
Objects
General Tab
1
3
5
2
4
551
1
2
3
4
5
Layer Tab
For information about the Layer tab, see
Layer Tab on page 123.
Materials Tab
For information about the Materials tab, see
Materials Tab on page 603.
Library Fireplaces
Several different fireplace symbols are
available in the Fixtures (Interior) library
category. Check the manufacturers product
information for dimensions of framing, and
552
Library
553
Other
Objects
Library Fireplaces
Chimneys
Chimneys for
Masonry Fireplaces
Place a soffit in position over the chimney chase, resize it to match, then extend
the soffit using the same method as
extending the masonry fireplace in the
3D view.
2.
3.
Chimney Chases
There are a couple of options to extend the
chimney chase.
554
Chapter 22:
Architectural
Blocks
Architectural
Blocks
Chapter Overview
Architectural blocks are built from groups of
3D objects. Once an architectural block is
created, the block behaves as a single object
while the components retain their own
attributes.
Many different types of objects can be added
to an architectural block. Cabinets, soffits,
fixtures, furniture, image objects, electrical
objects, terrain objects, road objects, slabs,
countertops, molding polylines, and polyline
solids can all be included in architectural
blocks.
The display of architectural blocks in floor
plan view can be controlled by layer.
Chapter Contents
555
Fixture/Furniture Symbols
Hardware Symbols
Millwork Symbols
Electrical objects
Images
Polyline Solids
Molding Polylines
The Library
Select Library> Architectural Block
Library
to access a library of
architectural blocks. Choose a block in the
Library Browser and click in the plan to
place it.
You can create your own architectural blocks
and save them to the Architectural Blocks
Library. See Adding to the Library on page
568.
556
In 3D Views
Click the Display Options
button to
open the Layer Display Options dialog.
This dialog allows objects to be turned on
and off by layer. See Displaying Objects
on page 125.
In 3D Views
Most architectural blocks can be selected in
vector views, overviews, and render views
using the Select Objects
tool.
Selecting Sub-Objects
Object
Tab
key.
557
Architectural
Blocks
Single/Multiple
To copy an architectural block or a group of
blocks, first select one or more architectural
blocks. Once selected, click the Copy/Paste
edit button. If you are copying the
blocks(s) to the same floor of the same plan,
click in the plan to place a copy.
If you are copying the block(s) to a different
floor of the same plan or to a different plan,
go to the new floor or new plan and select
Edit> Paste from the menu which will make
558
Multiple Copies
To make multiple copies of the same
object(s), select the object(s) and doubleclick the Copy/Paste
pasting.
Replicate Object
edit button. For more
information see Transform/Replicate
Object on page 793.
1.
2.
3.
4.
In 3D Views
Architectural blocks can be selected and
moved in vector and render views. Moving
an architectural block in 3D view will
regenerate the view. Moving an architectural
block that contains terrain objects will cause
the terrain to be rebuilt.
559
Architectural
Blocks
or Win-
Editing Sub-Objects
Certain attributes of an architectural block
can be edited at the object level. An object
can be edited by accessing the specification
dialog either of two ways:
edit button.
560
General Tab
3
4
If this box is not checked, all of the subobjects will display according to the display
properties set for their current layer. See
Displaying Objects on page 125.
561
Architectural
Blocks
Note: "Other" must be checked in the Schedule Specification dialog for the architectural
block to appear in the schedule. See Text
Tab on page 929.
Layer Tab
1
2
3
Label Tab
For information about the Label tab, see
Label Tab on page 485.
562
Chapter 23:
Libraries
Libraries
Chapter Overview
Chief Architects library contains thousands
of symbols, materials, and images that can
enhance any plan. Anything that you would
like to incorporate in your building design
that cannot be made with Chief Architects
architectural and drafting tools can be found
in the library, or created in the Create
Symbol Wizard and saved in the library for
future use.
New libraries and library enhancements are
being created by Chief Architect on a
continuing basis. There are also third party
developers who have created their own
libraries for Chief Architect which are
available for purchase.
Becoming familiar with the library will help
you realize Chief Architects full potential.
Chapter Contents
563
, Window Tools
Tools
display a Library
564
, Cabinet
; Furni-
; Fixture
; Hardware
Library
; Geometric Shapes
Library
Library
. Each accesses the library
category of the same name.
The Library Browser window has three
adjustable sections: library directory pane;
selection pane; and preview pane. To adjust
the height or width of a section, place the
pointer over the split bar you want to move.
When the double-headed arrow
appears,
click and drag.
The Library Browser can also be docked to
any side of the screen. See Docking the
Library Browser on page 567.
Libraries
3
4
1 Select the Library Browser tab to view
the Library Browser.
Library Category
Library 1
Library Folder 1
Library Subfolder
Library Object 1
Library Folder 2
Library 2
565
view.
If you have Scrollable List checked in your
preference settings, a scroll bar will be
present at the bottom of the selection pane.
See Library Browser Panel on page 98.
566
Docking the
Library Browser
567
Libraries
Add to Library
Library dialog.
568
to add a new
library to the selected category.
2.
button.
569
Libraries
Editing Libraries
Most libraries in the Library Browser are
locked and cannot be deleted, moved,
renamed, or modified; however new libraries
and library objects to be moved, copied,
deleted, and renamed.
Libraries
cannot be copied.
Deleting Libraries
,
Copy
from the contextual menu.
Highlight a new location in the tree view and
select Edit> Paste to paste a copy in the new
location.
570
Editing Libraries
Renaming Libraries
Unlocked Libraries, including the Folders
and library objects within them, can be
renamed.
To rename a library, folder, or library object,
open the Library Browser and select the
library object to be renamed. Choose
Library> Rename Object from the menu,
or right-click on the library object and select
Rename Object from the Contextual Menu.
The keyboard command Ctrl +R also allows
you to rename a library object.
Library names can contain up to 63
characters. Library names are also casesensitive. "OakCabinet" for example, will
not overwrite "Oakcabinet".
Expand/Collapse All
When a
Library level or
Folder level
item is selected in the tree view of the
Library Browser, Expand All and Collapse
All are available in the Library and
contextual menus, allowing you to expand or
contract its contents in the tree view.
Components
The display of library objects in the
Materials List is controlled in the
Components dialog. Select Library>
Components
Open Symbol
Any image, material, plant image,or symbol
in an
Unlocked library can be opened for
specification and edited from the Library
Browser menu.
The Symbol Specification dialog is very
similar to the Create Symbol Wizard. To
open the Symbol Specification dialog,
highlight a symbol in the tree view of the
Library Browser and select Edit> Open
Symbol
. See Symbol Specification
Dialog on page 880.
Preferences
Click the Preferences
button at the
bottom of the Library Browser directories
panel to open the Library Browser panel of
the Preferences dialog, where display
properties for the Library Browser are
controlled. See Library Browser Panel on
page 98.
571
Libraries
Keyboard Commands
The Library Browser can be navigated using
the arrow keys on your keyboard. The right
and left arrow keys expand and collapse
Folders; and the up and down keys change
which library object is currently selected.
If you have Scrollable List checked in your
preference settings, pressing the Tab key will
switch focus between the tree view and the
selection pane. Use your mouse to select an
object for placement. See Library Browser
Panel on page 98.
If you have Tiled To Fit Window checked in
your preference settings, pressing the Tab
key will switch focus between the tree view
and the selection pane. The arrow keys can
then be used to select a library object within
the selection pane.
572
and
Library Search
1
2
Library Categories
There are many library categories; and
within each, there can be any number of
libraries.
573
Libraries
My Libraries
Architectural Blocks
Backdrops
Cabinet Doors and Drawers
Cabinet Modules
CAD Blocks
Doors
Doorways
Electrical
Fixtures (Exterior)
Interior Fixtures
Exterior Furnishings
Interior Furnishings
Geometric Shapes
Hardware
Images
Materials
Millwork
Moldings and Profiles
Plants
Sprinklers
Terrain
Windows
My Libraries
The My Libraries category is a central
repository that can be used to store libraries
containing any and all kinds of objects. This
Architectural Blocks
Click the Architectural Block
Library
child button to open the
Library Browser to the Architectural Blocks
library category.
Architectural blocks are a combination of
objects that are grouped together. Once
blocked, they can be edited as a single object
and stored for future use.
For more information about architectural
blocks, see Architectural Blocks on page
555.
574
Backdrops
Backdrops
The Backdrops library category contains
many images that can be used for backdrops
in 3D and raytrace views.
Libraries
Cabinet Modules
Click the Cabinet Modules Library
child button to open the Library
Browser to the Cabinet Modules Library.
The Cabinet Modules library category
contains cabinet modules that can be placed
in floor plan view from the Library Browser
or the Cabinet Specification dialog.
Cabinets from the library can be selected and
moved around in the model.
They cannot be resized until they are opened
for specification and Allow Resize is
selected on the General tab of the Cabinet
Specification dialog.
575
CAD Blocks
Select CAD> CAD Block Library...
to open the Library Browser to the
CAD Blocks library category.
The CAD Blocks library category contains
2D CAD blocks that can be placed into any
view that allows CAD mode, including
layout pages.
The CAD Blocks library category includes a
wide variety of CAD objects such as product
specific CAD details; commonly used plan
Doors
The Doors library category contains custom
door styles that can be assigned to doors in
the 3D model. These doors can be selected
and dropped into any doorway to change the
door style for that doorway.
The Doors library category also contains
custom doors that can be placed within
doorway objects.
Doorways
Click the Doorway Library child
button to open the Library Browser to
the Doorways library category.
The Doorways library category contains
doorway configurations for grand entries;
interior archways; and garage door frames.
576
Electrical
Electrical
Fixtures (Exterior)
Click the Fixture Library (Exterior)
child button to open the Library
Browser to the Exterior Fixture library category.
The Exterior Fixture library category
contains symbols for many outdoor objects
commonly found on the exterior of a home.
Barbecues, plants, playground equipment,
hot tubs, mailboxes, doghouses, automobiles,
and a variety of road accessories are just
some of the objects found in the Exterior
Fixtures library category.
Sunrooms
The Fixtures (Exterior) library category
includes a Sunrooms library containing a
variety of sunroom components which can be
used to create many different styles of
sunrooms. Following are some of the
individual library objects assembled as a
sunroom unit.
Only one side of each section is provided. To
get the corresponding unit for the opposite
side, check Reverse Item in the specification
dialog for that sunroom section.
577
Libraries
Interior Fixtures
Click the Fixture Library (Interior)
child button to open the Library
Browser to the Interior Fixtures category.
The Interior Fixtures library category
contains a variety of interior fixtures such as
appliances, indoor stoves, fireplaces, HVAC,
surveillance cameras, and fire extinguishers.
Exterior Furnishings
Click the Furnishings Library (Exterior) child button to open the Library
Browser to the Exterior Furnishings library
category.
The Furnishings Library (Exterior) library
category contains outdoor furniture such as
benches, swings, planters, tables, and chairs.
Interior Furnishings
578
Click the Furnishings Library (Interior) child button to open the Library
Browser to the Furnishings Library (Interior)
library category.
Geometric Shapes
Libraries
Geometric Shapes
resized and combined with many other
objects for a variety of applications.
The Geometric Shapes library category contains cylinders, boxes, wedges, spheres,
cones, and other basic shapes which can be
Hardware
Click the Hardware Library child
button to open the Library Browser
window to the Hardware library category.
The Hardware library category contains
accessories that can be applied to doors and
drawers for commercial or residential use.
Images
Click the Images Library child button
to open the Library Browser to the
Images library category.
579
Materials
The Materials library category contains
materials that display in 3D and raytrace
views.
Materials can be applied to objects directly
from the Library Browser. See Applying
Materials on page 602. Once used in a plan,
materials are independent and can be edited
Millwork
The Millwork library category contains
objects such as door surrounds, balusters,
newels, corbels, mantels and cupolas. These
580
Libraries
tools. See
Plants
The Plant library category consists primarily
of images of plants and trees. See Plant
Image Specification Dialog on page 503.
The 3D Plants library also contains symbols
of plants. These symbols contain information
and attributes that apply specifically to
plants. See Plant Information on page 874
and Plant Attributes on page 875 .
By default plants reside on their own layer.
See Layer Display Options Dialog on page
119.
581
Sprinklers
The Sprinklers library category contains
different kinds of sprinklers that can be used
with the Sprinkler Tools
582
to detail
Terrain
Terrain
Click the Terrain Library child button
to open the Library Browser to the
Terrain library category.
Windows
Libraries
583
1
2
584
Libraries
1
2
3
4
1 Search Text - Enter a keyword or
585
Search Attributes
Right-click on an object in the the tree view
of the Library Browser and select Search
Attributes from the contextual menu to open
the Search Attributes dialog.
586
Specification Dialogs
Some objects, such as moldings and cabinet
doors, can be applied through the
specification dialogs of their containing
objects. For example, to place a cabinet door
on a particular cabinet, select the cabinet;
open it for specification; and click the
Library button on the General tab. See The
Select Library Object Dialog on page 572.
Place Library
Object Button
The Place Library Object button can
be added to your toolbar and used for
quick access and placement of frequently
used library items. See Adding Toolbar
Buttons on page 18.
Materials
Materials on objects can be changed or added
whenever an object is open for specification.
The Materials tab of every specification
dialog allows you to access the Select
Material dialog and change the material.
Placement Restrictions
A library object comes with placement
restrictions based upon typical real-life
placement. Library windows, for example,
must be placed in a wall, just like standard
windows; library doors must be placed in an
existing doorway; and some appliances must
be placed in cabinets.
Library objects that are symbols have
placement restrictions which are determined
when the symbol is created but can be
changed later. See see Symbols vs. Native
Objects on page 591 and Symbol
Specification Dialog on page 880.
587
Libraries
1
2
588
3D Views
All library objects except CAD blocks
display in 3D views. Images will always
rotate to face the camera in 3D views. For
information about how to avoid this, see
Non-Rotating Images on page 543.
Terrain objects can be viewed in 3D only
when a terrain perimeter exists. See Terrain
Tools on page 490.
Multiple Objects
Multiple objects may be selected and moved,
copied or deleted as a group. Select the first
object, then hold down the Shift key and click
on objects to add or subtract them from the
page 478.
589
Libraries
Copy/Paste
edit button; and drag the
pointer from the center handle to create a
new copy. Release the mouse button
when the copy is located properly. This is
especially useful in elevation or cross
section views, since it provides good control of relative positioning.
590
1.
3.
Click OK.
3.
By Dragging
When all five handles appear, the library
object may be resized by dragging.
To resize by dragging:
1.
2.
2.
3.
Open Object
tool.
591
Libraries
2.
Open Symbol
When a symbol is selected, the Open
Symbol edit button displays. Clicking
this button will open the Symbol
Specification dialog for the selected
symbol. Any changes made affect only the
selected symbol. See Open Symbol on
page 881.
The Symbol Specification dialog has
much in common with the Create Symbol
Wizard. See Symbol Specification Dialog
on page 880.
Architectural Blocks
Click the Open Object
edit button for a
selected object from the Architectural Blocks
library category to open the Architectural
Block Specification dialog. See
Architectural Block Specification Dialog
on page 561.
Backdrops
Backdrops can be selected in the 3D
Settings dialog or added directly to a
render view from the Library Browser; they
cannot, however, be opened for specification.
See Images & Backdrops on page 657.
Cabinets
Click the Open Object
edit button for a
selected object from the Cabinet Modules
library category to open the Cabinet
Specification dialog for that cabinet type.
See Cabinet Specification Dialog on page
475.
If a cabinet is selected and the Open Symbol
edit button displays, clicking it will open
592
CAD Blocks
Click the Open Object
edit button for a
selected object from the CAD Blocks library
category to open the CAD Block
Specification dialog. See CAD Block
Specification Dialog on page 755.
Electrical
Click the Open Object
edit button for a
selected object from the Electrical library
category to open the Electrical Service
Specification dialog. See Electrical
Service Specification Dialog on page 437.
If an electrical object is selected and the
Open Symbol
edit button displays,
clicking it will open the Symbol
Specification dialog for the selected
electrical object. See Symbol Specification
Dialog on page 880.
Terrain
Objects added to the Terrain library category
are group selected and saved. Once they are
in the plan, they become separate terrain
objects which can be individually selected
and opened for specification. Terrain features
will open the Terrain Feature
Specification dialog; roads will open the
Road Specification dialog; and so on.
See The Terrain Library on page 499.
Textures
Textures can be applied to materials; they
cannot, however, be opened for specification.
See Plan Materials Dialog on page 601.
Windows
Furniture, Fixtures,
Geometric Shapes,
Hardware, & Millwork
Click the Open Object
edit button for a
selected object from any of these library
categories to open a specification dialog
referred to as the Library Object
Specification dialog. See Library Object
Specification Dialog on page 594.
If a library object from any of these
categories is selected and the Open Symbol
edit button displays, clicking it will open
the Symbol Specification dialog for the
selected library object. See Symbol
Specification Dialog on page 880.
593
Libraries
Images
General Tab
1
2
4
3
594
Options Tab
Libraries
Label Tab
For information about the Label tab, see
Label Tab on page 485.
Fill Tab
For information about the Fill tab, see Fill
Style Tab on page 743.
Layer Tab
For information about the Layer tab, see
Layer Tab on page 123.
Materials Tab
For information about the Materials tab, see
Materials Tab on page 603.
595
596
Chapter 24:
Materials
Chapter Contents
Creating Materials
Mapping Patterns and Textures
Managing Plan Materials
Applying Materials
Materials Tab
Editing Materials
Define Material Dialog
Material Defaults Dialog
597
Materials
Chapter Overview
Creating Materials
Chief Architect comes with many materials
which are ready for use. They are found in
the Materials category of the Library
Browser. See Materials on page 580. If you
cannot find a suitable material, edit an
existing material to meet your needs or create
your own new material. See Editing
Materials on page 604.
Once you have a suitable material, it can be
applied to objects. See Applying Materials
on page 602.
Note: Adding a material to a plan is not the
same as adding it to the library. If you would
like a new material to be available for use in
other plans, it should be added to the library.
598
Converting
Textures to Materials
An entire folder of textures can be
converted into a library of materials.
When converted the folder of materials will
assume the same file structure in the
Materials category of the Library Browser.
Select 3D> Materials> Convert Texture to
Materials
and then browse to a folder of
textures on your computer.
Converting
Material.dat files
Material.dat files, which were used in prior
versions of Chief Architect, can be converted
to materials and saved directly to the Library
Browser by selecting 3D> Materials>
Convert Material Definition (.dat) Files
from the menu.
Converting Material
Template Plans
Select 3D> Materials> Create Plan
Materials Library to create a library
of materials based on the materials being
used in the current plan. This is useful for
converting material template plans, a
common way to store material definitions in
prior versions of Chief Architect, into a
materials library. This command will create a
new library in the Materials category using
the same name as the template plan. Adding
materials to the library individually allows
you to store the material within the existing
directory structure.
599
Materials
600
601
Materials
Applying Materials
Materials are stored in the Materials library
in the Library Browser. They can be applied
to objects in a variety of ways.
Material Painter
The Material Painter
tool allows
you to apply a new material to a
selected object in a 3D or render view. Click
the Material Painter
602
Material Eyedropper
The Material Eyedropper tool allows
you to load the material assigned to an
existing object and apply that material to
other objects.
In a 3D view, click the Material Eyedropper
button and then click on the surface
of an object to load its material assignment.
The pointer then changes (
) to indicate
that the material is ready to be applied to
another object. The material can then be
applied to other objects using the Material
Painter
tool. You can continue to apply
the material to the surfaces of other objects.
Viewing Materials
Viewing Materials
Materials do not display in vector views. See
Vector View Tools on page 624. Materials
will display in render views and raytrace
views. See Render View Tools on page
652.
If you recieve an error message when
creating render views your plan might
contain two textures of the same name or
textures that did not originally come with the
program.
603
Materials
Materials Tab
Editing Materials
If you cannot find a material that suits your
needs, you can create a new material or edit
an existing one. Applying a different material
to an object is not the same as editing an
existing material. See Applying Materials
on page 602.
When a material is applied from the library
to an object in a plan, a copy of that material
is being made and saved with the plan. If you
access the Define Material dialog through
a menu or object specification dialog , your
edits will affect that material wherever it is
found within that plan. Other objects in that
plan which use that material will be affected;
but objects outside of the current plan will be
unaffected.
If you access the Define Material dialog
for a particular material directly from the
Library Browser, your edits will affect all
objects in other plans that use that library
604
Plan Materials
Click the Plan Materials
button to open
the Plan Material dialog for the current
plan. Select a material and click the Edit,
Copy, or New button to open the Define
Material dialog. You can choose to add a
newly defined material to the library from
the Plan Material dialog by selecting it and
clicking the Add to Library button. See
Plan Materials Dialog on page 601.
Library Browser
605
Materials
General Tab
1
2
3
4
606
Low Contrast
Normal
Contrast
High
Contrast
607
Materials
Types
Every material is classified by Type. The
Type defines how the material is calculated
in the Material List. Some Types are
associated with patterns but not every Type is
associated with a 3D pattern. Not every Type
is calculated in the Material List.
Following are the available Types and their
characteristics:
Framing - These types are used by the
program to estimate stick framing quantities
if they are applied to the main layer of a wall
layer definition.
Brick - Displays a typical brick course
pattern. The height and length of the brick
can be specified. This can be specified for
anything using this type of layout, including
plywood with staggered joints. The Material
List calculates the number of bricks (by
height and length) which fit on the total
surface area of the defined object. For a wall,
the surface area is used. For a full masonry
wall with two layers of brick, be sure to
define the wall as having two layers to get
the right count. You can define the mortar
width which enables the program to do an
accurate count of bricks.
Strip - Shows a parallel line pattern in 3D
views. The height, or separation of the lines,
and the angle can be specified. The Material
List calculates lineal footage based on the
height of the strip and the surface area being
covered. Overlap is subtracted from the
608
Materials
609
Pattern Tab
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
610
Texture Tab
1
2
3
4
Materials
611
Render Tab
1
2
3
5
612
1
2
3
4
5
6
Advanced options provide more control over
the appearance of the rendered material. If
any Advanced value is changed, the Render
tab displays the Advanced options when you
edit that material. You can always change
back to the Simple settings.
613
Materials
Raytrace Tab
For information about the Raytrace tab, see
Raytrace Tab on page 677.
614
Chapter 25:
Chapter Overview
Chapter Contents
Zoom Tools
Undo Zoom
Fill Window
Panning the Display
Window Menu Tools
Cascade
Tiling Views
Arrange Icons
Swapping Views
Aerial View
Closing Views
Zoom &
View Tools
Zoom Tools
Zoom - This is used to magnify any
given area on the plan or 3D view.
Click the Zoom
tool, then click and hold
down the left mouse button while dragging a
box around an area on screen. When you
release the mouse, the selected area expands
tool again.
615
Undo Zoom
Click the Undo Zoom
button to
reverse the last zoom operation. Undo
Zoom
only works to undo the most
recent zoom.
Note: Undo
zoom.
and Redo
do not affect
Fill Window
Click the Fill Window
button or
616
2.
2.
or Tile
Vertically
to tile all open views. See
Tiling Views on page 619.
Click Arrange Icons
to arrange all open
views which are currently minimized. See
Arrange Icons on page 620.
617
Zoom &
View Tools
1.
Cascade
Select Window> Cascade to cascade
all open views. Cascade is a Windows
function which allows you to organize open
618
Tiling Views
2.
3.
view.
619
Zoom &
View Tools
Tiling Views
Arrange Icons
Arrange Icons is a Windows function
used when several active windows have been
minimized. Select Window> Arrange Icons
to align the minimized title bars in a row at
Swapping Views
There are several ways to swap views.
620
button.
Aerial View
Aerial View
the right side of the window; but it can be
moved to any other edge or into the middle
of the window while pressing the Ctrl key.
Zoom &
View Tools
The border that displays in the aerial view window (in red for
illustrative purposes) coincides with the floor plan view display.
621
button.
to open the
Closing Views
Choose File> Close or click the
at the top
right corner of the window to close any view
when it is no longer needed. If the view is
622
Chapter 26:
Vector Views
Chapter Overview
Chapter Contents
623
Vector
Views
Camera Views
The Vector Full Camera tool creates a
multi-floor view of the 3D model. It
can be used to create both interior and
exterior perspectives. The Vector Full
Camera is a good tool for displaying
cathedral ceilings, roofs, lofts, stairwell
openings, or any other variation in floor and
ceiling levels.
The Vector Floor Camera creates a
vector view of the current floor only.
This camera does not show anything above
the ceiling or below the floor. It is faster to
generate than a vector full camera view,
because less of the model is calculated.
Checking Restrict Camera to Room in the
3D Settings dialog will limit the view to
the current room. See 3D Settings on page
645.
A Render Full Camera
view can be
created from a vector camera view. See
Render Views From Vector Views on page
652.
Both theVector Full Camera and the Vector
Floor Camera can be moved, rotated,
raised, lowered or have their line of sight
adjusted. The default camera height, angle
and move increment are defined in the
Camera Defaults dialog. See Creating
Camera Views on page 626.
624
Overviews
The Vector Full Overview creates an
isometric drawing of the entire model,
including all floors, ceilings, and the roof.
All surfaces such as roofs, walls, and ceilings
can be removed from the view in order to see
into the model.
The Vector Floor Overview creates a
single floor isometric drawing of the
current floor without a roof or ceiling. All
lines are in true length but the drawing
cannot be scaled.
The Framing Overview creates an
isometric drawing of the framing in the
model. Framing must be built before
generating a framing overview. Framing
overviews include all floors, walls, roof
framing and foundations. Overviews can be
rotated and viewed from any angle.
Overviews can be printed directly; sent to
the layout; or sent to a CAD detail. As a
CAD detail, the lines defining any part of the
view can be edited. If sent to the layout, the
lines defining any part of the view can be
modified or deleted in the layout using the
Edit Layout
tool. See Creating
Overviews on page 629.
3D Tools
625
Vector
Views
3D Tools
tool and
2.
Line of
Sight
(drag)
Camera
(click)
626
Focal
Point
(release)
FOV Indicators
3.
4.
Orbit Camera Left - Rotates the camera to the left about the focal point.
627
Vector
Views
628
Objects
Creating Overviews
Click the Vector Floor Overview
Vector Full Overview
; or Vector Fram-
ing Overview
button to generate an
overview in a new window.
To create an overview
1.
or the Render
parent button.
629
Vector
Views
Camera edit
handles
2.
; Full
; or Framing Overview
child button.
3.
Full Overview
Click the Full Overview
button to
generate an isometric drawing of the entire
building. The overview will begin to
generate immediately.
Framing Overview
Click the Framing Overview
button to
generate an isometric drawing of the entire
building, displaying only framing and
foundation. Framing must be built before
generating this view, otherwise the view will
be empty. The overview will begin to
generate immediately.
Floor Overview
Floor Overview
is an effective
troubleshooting tool, since it can isolate each
floor for review. Click the Floor Overview
button to create an isometric drawing of
the current floor. The ceiling is removed,
giving a 3D view of that floor plan.
630
Displaying Overviews
Displaying Overviews
parent
631
Vector
Views
Displaying 3D Views
Up to eight total 3D view windows can be
open with one floor plan view. A camera
symbol displays in floor plan view for each
3D view window that is open. The views are
named and numbered sequentially in the
order they were created. The camera symbol
is an on-screen reference, and does not print.
Note: An object will not show in 3D views if
its 3D display has been turned off in the
Layer Display Options dialog.
to open
the Layer Display Options dialog. See
Displaying Objects on page 125.
Color Off/On
Click the Color toggle button to
control the display of color in all views
except render views. You can set defaults to
specify whether cross section/elevations;
vector views;and vector overviews will be
generated with colors turned on in the
Options tab of the 3D Settings dialog.
The display of colors may or may not make a
view easier to understand. Experiment to see
what works for you, then set your default for
each view.
Colors are used in vector views to represent
the use of different materials. The colors can
632
Changing Materials
in 3D Views
From a vector view or overview, there are a
number of ways to change the way that
objects display. See Editing Materials on
page 604.
, Zoom Out
or Fill Window
buttons does not change
the field of view, but will redraw the view
zoomed or out, or adjusted as you want. You
can use the Zoom tools to simulate Field of
View settings.
633
Vector
Views
634
Delete 3D Surface
Delete 3D Surface
Individual surfaces can be temporarily
removed from any 3D view by clicking
the Delete View Surface
button and then
clicking on a surface. Surfaces removed in
one view will be removed in all 3D views,
but are not permanently removed from the
model. Continue clicking on surfaces to
remove them, then select another tool to end
the process.
Saving 3D Views
Saving 3D Camera Views
You can save any vector or render
camera view either by opening the
camera for specification in floor plan view
and clicking the Save button in the Camera
Specification dialog; or by clicking the
Save Camera
open.
635
Vector
Views
Saving Cross
Section/Elevation Views
Activate Camera
Activating Views
edit button.
button from
edit button.
Remove 3D
Choose 3D> Remove 3D from floor
plan view to close all 3D views
associated with the current plan file and
remove unsaved 3D data from memory.
Any views saved with the plan will be closed
but not deleted.
Walkthroughs
Any vector camera view or overview can be
used to record a walkthrough. Walkthroughs
636
Wall Elevation
same way:
1.
views and
or
Cross Section/Elevation
buttons
and the pointer changes to a
with
crosshairs on the icon marking the position of the pointer.
2.
3.
Cross Section/Elevation
views and
Wall Elevation
views are accurate 2D
elevations of the 3D model. Although they
display objects at different depths from the
camera, all lines in the view are in the same
plane when sent to layout.
Cross section/elevations and wall elevations
have the editing capabilities found in other
3D views, and can be further enhanced with
the CAD tools. They are the traditional,
orthogonal views that are used in drafting.
Lines and dimensions are true lengths, which
makes it easy to see accurate spatial
relationships of the 3D objects created in the
model.
If a cross section line does not cut through a
3D object and the object is within the back
clipped distance, such as a window shown in
elevation, the object retains its 3D definition.
3D objects can be selected, moved, stretched,
or otherwise modified in a cross section/
elevation view. The 3D model is updated in
all views.
637
Vector
Views
Cross Section/Elevation
Wall Elevations
Always drag the Wall Elevation
camera
perpendicularly toward the wall to be
viewed. The length of the line is not
important.
638
Auto-Detailing
To save time, use the Auto-Detailing
tool to give you a head-start in
detailing your cross section/elevation
view. The auto-detailer automatically creates
CAD objects for commonly detailed aspects
of a view. To activate the auto-detailer, select
CAD> Autodetail...
, Wall Elevation
, and
639
Vector
Views
In floor plan view, select the camera symbol; click the Open Object
edit
button to display the Cross Section/
Camera
button.
tool.
Select the camera symbol; open it to display the Camera Specification dialog; and click the Activate button.
640
Open Object
button.
4
Clip Surfaces Within - Specifies that the
camera does not display an object within this
distance.
Remove Wall Within - Removes the view of
walls within this distance of the camera.
641
Vector
Views
642
, Wall Eleva-
tion
Camera Defaults
dialog.
1
2
3
4
Camera Defaults
Default Settings can be accessed by
selecting Edit> Default Settings from
the menu or by double clicking the Render
Tools
parent button.
Vector
Views
643
Cross Section/Elevation
Views,
Views, and
Wall Elevation
Views. The length is
measured in plan inches.
644
3D Settings
3D Settings
All 3D views are affected by settings in the
3D Settings dialog. 3D settings are not
global settings, they are saved with each plan
file.
; or double-click
Options Tab
5
7
11
2
4
6
8
Vector
Views
12
13
9
10
645
Floor Camera
Views. See Vector View
Tools on page 624.
Check this box to suppress the generation of
objects beyond the room containing the
camera. If checked, the view through a
doorway into another room shows only blank
space. Use this option to maximize computer
resources or to minimize file size when
creating a single room 3D Walkthrough
movie.
Unrestricted camera view.
and Cross
Section/Elevation
views. Choose this
option to show section and elevation cameras
in floor plan view. Active cameras display in
red; inactive cameras display in green and
can be reactivated. Inactive cameras can also
be selected for display in the Layer
Display Options
dialog. Saved
cameras are listed in the Project Browser.
646
3D Settings
647
Backdrop Tab
2
3
648
Creating Backdrops
New backdrops can be created using a
variety of graphic file formats. Backdrops
are automatically adjusted to fit the window
size, so they look best when they are created
with the same height to width proportions as
the window you are working in.
Scanned images from photographs or digital
photos can be used to create backdrops of a
specific building site.
See Images & Backdrops on page 657 and
Adding Materials to the Library on page
569.
Chapter 27:
Render Views
Chapter Overview
Chapter Contents
Render
Views
649
Rendering Tools
These tools are unique to the render view and
can accessed from the 3D and contextual
menus as well as the Quality/Style Settings
parent button.
The Adjust Lights option allows a
user to edit the current lights that are
being used in the render view. The lights are
displayed in a list for easy selecting. Interior
default lights in the list cannot be changed or
altered, but the default sun can be changed.
You can quickly adjust lights to get the
desired appearance in the render view. Use
the checkboxes to turn lights on and off.
Selecting a light and choosing "Adjust" in
the Adjust Lights dialog opens a dialog
box. If it is an added light, the dialog is the
Light Specification dialog. If you open a
Light Fixture, the dialog consists of the Render Data tab of the Electrical Service
Specification dialog. See Adjusting
Lights on page 666.
Click the Sunlight Toggle button to
turn on and off the light source that
represents the sun. This feature can be used
650
Rendering Tools
Other 3D Tools
These tools are common to both the vector
and render views and overviews. They can
be either accessed from the render toolbar or
the menu.
Choose from the Camera Orbit,
Tilt and Move tools in the render toolbar to
adjust the camera view. See Editing a
Camera in 3D Views on page 627.
651
Render
Views
652
, Ren-
, or a Render
Framing Overview
Render Tools
parent button and then
clicking the child tool. See Creating
Overviews on page 629.
Chief Architect renders the image based on
the render view Options on the Options tab
of the 3D Settings dialog. See 3D
Settings on page 645.
Render Tools
parent button and
selecting the Glass House Render Camera
tool to click and drag a camera angle.
In glass house view, your render view is
drawn by making the surfaces in the scene
semi-transparent. This allows you to view
the spatial relationships between areas within
the house, and examine the interior and
exterior simultaenously.
button.
653
Render
Views
Low Detail
feature. See
654
Camera Movement
Camera Movement
In 3D Views
Render Full Camera
Views can be
, Mouse-Pan Camera
, the Mouse
655
Render
Views
Field of View
The Field of View can be adjusted in render
views. In an active render view, click the
Edit Camera
button to open the
Camera Specification dialog. Change
the Field of View to the desired angle. See
Camera Specification Dialog on page 641.
The field of view can also be adjusted with
the mouse wheel while in render view, if
your mouse is equipped with one.
656
Images
Images are very important for the appearance
of rendered views and VRML file export.
Images are bitmap files which represent
individual objects, such as trees, flowers,
cars, people, etc. They are marked in floor
plan view with a 2D Block and are visible in
vector views.
Backdrops
Backdrops are images which display in the
background of 3D views. Only one backdrop
can be used at a time. If a backdrop is not
applied, Chief Architect will apply a default
background color. Backdrops are selected
and removed on the Backdrop tab of the 3D
Settings dialog. The background color for
render views is also defined there. See
Creating Backdrops on page 648.
You can drag and drop a backdrop directly
into a render view from the Library Browser.
Select a backdrop from the upper pane of the
Library Browser, notice that the pointer
changes in render view (
) to indicate that
a backdrop is loaded for placement, and then
click in a render view to apply the selected
backdrop.
Spherical Backdrops
The render view allows a special type of
backdrop called a Spherical Panoramic
Backdrop. These options are used to have
the backdrop rotate as you move the render
view Camera.
To enable Spherical Panoramic Backdrops,
you can turn them on from the Backdrop tab
of the 3D Settings dialog. You can then
adjust how much the backdrop wraps around
the scene.
Adjusting the Horizontal Angle will
determine how many times the backdrop
should appear as you rotate in a full circle
from side-to-side. A value of 360 will cause
the backdrop to wrap around the scene once.
A value of 720 will cause it to wrap around
the scene twice. 180 will cause only half the
backdrop to wrap around the scene.
Adjusting the Vertical Angle will determine
how much the backdrop should stretch upand-down. To have the backdrop stretch from
the highest point in the sky to the lowest
point in the ground, use a value of 180. To
have the backdrop stretch from just below a
horizontal render to just above, use a smaller
value such as 100.
It takes a special camera or an image
processing program to generate spherical
panoramic backdrops. Some experimenting
with the images and the Angle values may be
necessary to achieve the desired results.
Render
Views
657
Plan Export
When transferring a plan to another
computer, or to another user, it is helpful to
have all of the Images, Textures, and
Backdrops used in the plan. The Plan
Export tool accessed through File> Export
2.
The Export Picture File dialog displays with the current directory specified.
3.
4.
5.
658
Faster Rendering
To improve rendering speed, consider
turning off the following options
Always Rebuild - This forces Chief
Architect to re-create the entire model for
each frame. For most video cards you will
want to turn this off, and turn Keep All
Surfaces on.
Keep All Surfaces - When Chief Architect
creates the 3D model, this option toggles
whether to only create surfaces facing you.
On most OpenGL-accelerated video cards, it
is faster to create the model with all surfaces
once, rather than re-create it every time the
camera position changes. For most scenarios
you will want to turn this on, and turn
Always Rebuild off.
Use Triangles - This determines whether or
not lights will illuminate the scene
accurately. Turning off this option will speed
up render times, but will result in large
objects (such as walls) appearing to be lit
incorrectly. When you are editing in a render
659
Render
Views
Light Sources
Lighting is extremely important for render
views, raytracing, and VRML file export.
Even small changes can have a large impact
on image quality.
In a render view, lighting calculations are
done on a room-by-room basis. The render
view uses only the lights in the room which
contains the camera. When the camera is
outside of a building the program normally
uses sunlight for lighting calculations. In this
case, all of the other lights are turned off.
It is possible to turn the sunlight off and to
have all the other exterior lights turned on to
simulate night time views. The sun can be
controlled like other light types.
660
Ambient Lights
Ambient light is additive to other lights in a
room or scene. Ambient light settings are
Light Types
Light Types
Light Fixtures
Added Lights
Sunlight
Default Lights
Default Lights
If you create an interior render view and no
user defined lights exist, the program will
create a Default Light source within the
room. The Default Interior light acts like a
central point source.
It cannot be adjusted in any way. If you want
control over the light sources in your interior
render views, you must add a light to the
room that you are rendering by placing a
lighting fixture or by adding a light using
3D> Add Lights.
661
Render
Views
Intensity
Color
Tilt Angle
Dir Angle
On
Casts Shadows
Soft Shadows
Light Fixtures
Electric symbols placed in floor plan view
that represent a Light Fixture may create
one or more light sources in Render and
Raytrace Views. The light type and
properties for each fixture can be modified
by selecting the fixture, clicking the Open
662
Object
Light Types
Added Lights
3D> Add Lights allows you to quickly add a
light in the floor plan view. Added Lights
are similar to Light Fixtures, but they only
generate a light source in the Render and/or
Raytrace View. They do not create a 3D
object that appears in 3D views. Added lights
can be placed into an object which would
normally not generate a light source such as a
TV.
To add a Parallel Light:
1.
2.
2.
2.
3.
Sun Angles
663
Render
Views
2.
and click.
3.
4.
Deleting Shadows
Shadows
The Sun Angle function allows the shadow
cast by a building at any time of the year to
be displayed. Sun Angles can also be used as
a light source in render views.
664
In the Sun Angle Specification dialog, click Make shadow to delete the
existing and create a new shadow.
In the Sun Angle Specification dialog, click the Delete Shadow button.
Parallel Lights
A Parallel Light has a direction but
no position. The light appears to
illuminate all objects with equal intensity, as
if it were at an infinite distance from the
object. A Parallel Light source is commonly
used to simulate distant light sources, such as
the sun. It is the best choice of light to use for
maximum speed generating render views.
Parallel Light sources are represented in
floor plan view by three arrows. To modify
the light, double-click on it or select it, then
click the Open Object
Spot Lights
A Spot Light focuses the light in a
specified direction. The location,
cone angle, direction and intensity
of a Spot Light can be defined. Spot Lights
cannot be placed directly in the plan. They
are created by changing an existing lights
specification. Once defined as a Spot Light,
the direction of a spot light can be changed in
the Light Specification dialog or for an
added light source, by rotating the light in
floor plan view.
Point Lights
Render
Views
665
Adjusting Lights
Once lights have been added to the model,
they can be edited or adjusted using the
Adjust Lights dialog. Sometimes you will
want to adjust the lights from the render view
to get immediate results, other times you
may want to adjust lights in floor plan view
where you can easily see their position
within a room.
3.
4.
5.
6.
666
Tools
1
2
3
4
5
6
The previous values default to the settings on the Special CAD panel of the
Preferences dialog.
10
11
12
6 In the lower part of the Sun Angle
667
Render
Views
3
4
You can define if the Sun Angle will be used
as a light source in render views. Set the
parameters here if you want to use the Sun
Angle as a light source in render views.
668
Light Specification
1
2
3
4
5
11
6
7
9
10
13
12
14
15
Render
Views
669
670
671
Render
Views
672
Raytracing
Chapter Overview
Raytracing is a technology which allows the
creation of highly realistic images from your
Chief Architect plans. Whereas rendering
draws your model onto the screen, raytracing
actually traces the rays of light from your
camera as they bounce and reflect into your
scene. As a result, raytracing is somewhat
slower than OpenGL rendering, but can be
used to achieve much more complicated
Chapter Contents
673
Raytracing
Chapter 28:
Raytrace Properties
1 Width/Height the size, in pixels, of
674
Raytrace Parameters
2 Radiosity Radiosity is a slower, but
Without Radiosity
With Radiosity
675
Raytracing
676
Raytracing
Raytrace Tab
1
2
3
4
5
677
678
Raytrace Quality
It is not hard to create an image that looks
reasonably realistic with raytracing;
however, producing an image that really
looks like a photograph takes extra attention
to detail. Here are a few tips for achieving
the most photo-realistic images possible:
Use Radiosity - Although slower, radiosity
adds significant depth to the scene by
simulating the way that light works in the
POV-Ray
The Persistance of Vision Raytracer (POVRay) is a high-quality, yet entirely free
raytracer. The POV-Ray raytracer has been
used for over ten years to generate images of
virtually anything imaginable. POV-Ray has
even been used on the space shuttle!
679
Raytracing
POV-Ray
To use a Chief Architect scene in the POVRay raytracer, you can export your scene to
POV-Ray format (.pov) file. You must be in
a render view to export to POV-Ray format.
From the render view go to File> Export
680
Chapter 29:
Dimensions
Dimensions
Chapter Overview
Chief Architect provides many dimensioning
tools. In addition, Dimension Lines can be
selected, edited, and customized. Extension
Lines can also be customized with the mouse
or opened for specification.
Dimensions are also useful for accurately
positioning objects by defining the
dimensions that locate them.
Chapter Contents
681
Accuracy
Chief Architect utilizes a different method
for rounding dimensions than in prior
versions. Prior versions displayed the
distance between equally spaced objects
correctly, but dimension runs werent always
accurate when added. In Versions 9 and later,
dimension runs always add up correctly.
Dimensioning the same object in different
ways will also obtain the same results as long
as the object being dimensioned is placed in
the model with the same accuracy as the
precision of the dimension lines. If, however,
an object is placed using more precision than
the dimensions, results may vary.
Dimension Fonts
In Version 9 and prior, text size was based on
sizing information stored in each font rather
than actual character dimensions.
To maintain the same font size in legacy
plans, select Legacy Dimension Conversion
and check the Version 9 Compatible Size
box on the Font panel of the Preferences
dialog. See Font Panel on page 97.
Dimension Defaults
Default Settings can be accessed by
selecting Edit> Default Settings
or by double-clicking the Dimension Tools
parent or Manual Dimension
button.
child
682
Drag manual
dimension
End-to-End Dimensions
The End-to-End Dimension
tool
is used to dimension between any two
defined points or objects in floor plan view.
Click the End-to-End Dimension
tool,
then drag the dimension from the first object
to the second object. The dimension line will
snap to each object, ignoring any other
objects located between either end.
Angular Dimensions
The Angular Dimension
tool
displays the angle between any two
straight edges, including lines; walls; the
sides of boxes; the straight sides of polylines;
cabinets; and soffits. Any straight line or side
within a CAD block can be dimensioned, as
well. Edges nested up to four levels deep
within a CAD block can be dimensioned.
Click on the first line, then drag and release
on the second. The line's start and end points
should be as close as possible to the objects.
Do not pull the angular dimension past the
object as you might with a normal straight
dimension line.
683
Dimensions
Manual Dimensions
Interior Dimensions
The Interior Dimension
child
button is used to create interior
dimensions. Draw a dimension line through
walls, at right angles only, to create interior
dimensions in floor plan view.
The Interior Dimension
tool locates
interior walls only. It will not dimension
between surfaces in the same wall. Allowed
dimension angles match the allowed wall
angles for each plan.
Interior Dimension will locate either the
wall surface or the main layer, depending on
the settings in the Locate Objects tab of the
684
to Point Dimension
line can be
accurately relocated by specifying new
dimension values. See Moving Objects
Using Dimensions on page 690.
Baseline Dimensions
The Baseline Dimension
tool
creates a series of dimensions that all
share the same origin instead of continuing
from each previous location. Dimension
lines created by the Baseline Dimension
tool are independent and can be edited
separately.
Select the Baseline Dimension
child
button; click near an object in floor plan
view; and drag a dimension line near or
through the objects requiring dimensions.
Auto Exterior
Dimensions
The Auto Exterior Dimension
tool generates dimensions around a
plans exterior in floor plan view. The
dimension lines locate walls and openings as
685
Dimensions
Extension
Lines
Dimension
Labels
Arrowheads
Tools
child buttons and click on a
dimension line; or by right-clicking on it
using any tool. When you have selected a
dimension line, edit handles display. See
Editing Dimension Lines on page 687.
Multliple dimension lines can be added to a
selection set by holding down the Shift key.
686
edit
Del
key on the
Dimensions
2.
3.
4.
687
1.
2.
3.
688
2.
2.
Dimensions
arrow
4.
3.
2.
3.
689
Select the object and click on the dimension that will be used to locate it.
2.
690
3.
4.
1.
Dimensions
6.
2.
3.
Click OK.
4.
Draw the angular dimension line, beginning and ending the line on the objects
you want to move.
2.
5.
1.
Fill Window
691
3.
4.
5.
6.
692
edit button.
Dimension Tab
Dimensions
1
2
4
693
Extension Tab
2
4
6
1
3
694
Layer Tab
Arrow Tab
For information about the Arrow Tab, see
Arrow Tab on page 735.
Imperial Plans
1
3
5
7
9
2
4
6
8
695
Dimensions
3 Decimal Inches/Centimeters/mm -
Imperial Plans
11
13
15
17
19
21
696
10
12
14
16
18
20
tool to
Dimensions
tool locate doors and
windows automatically. If the check is
removed, openings may still be located using
the Manual Dimension
tool.
Dimensions
tool locate the overall
exterior dimensions.
697
Dimensions
1
3
5
7
9
2
4
10
6
8
and Manual
tools.
698
Dimensions
699
Extensions Tab
1
3
2
4
700
Font tab
1
2
Arrow Tab
For information about the Arrow tab, Arrow
Tab on page 735.
701
Dimensions
702
Chapter 30:
Text
Text
Chapter Overview
Text is an ideal way to draw attention to
design elements. Text can be added in floor
plan view; cross section/elevation view; and
to layout.
Text lines with arrow can be attached to text
objects, allowing you to direct attention to
specific plan details.
The display of text can be controlled by layer
or set specifically for each text object.
Chapter Contents
Text Defaults
The Text Tools
Fonts
Adding Text
Text Arrows
Displaying Text
Selecting Text
Editing Text
Text Macros
Special Text Characters
Text Specification Dialog
Text Defaults
Arrow Defaults
Text Defaults
Default settings can be accessed by
selecting Edit> Default Settings....
See Text Defaults on page 714.
703
Fonts
Chief Architect allows multiple fonts to be
used within the same file. Only one font may
be defined for each text object; but each text
object may use a different font.
Blueprint Fonts
Three architectural fonts: Blueprindbt, City
Blueprint, and Country Blueprint are
included with Chief Architect.
Adding Text
Text can be added in floor plan view; to
CAD details; to elevation views; or in
layout files.
To add text
704
1.
2.
3.
4.
Text Arrows
Text Arrows
The Text With Arrow tool places a text
object with an arrow already attached.
This arrow can be selected and moved like
any other arrow.
behaves like a
705
Text
Create a text object that includes a number such as, Foundation Wall Height 1.
2.
3.
Select and open the arrow for specification, check Special Use on the Arrow
tab, and click OK.
4.
The text object should now read Foundation Wall Height 3' 0".
Displaying Text
Text display attributes can be controlled by
layer. By default, text is initially placed on
the layer specified by the default text object.
See Displaying Objects on page 125.
Selecting Text
To select a single text object, click on that
object while in Text
706
or Select Objects
Editing Text
or Select Objects
mode.
Editing Text
Text can be edited in a variety of ways.
Rotate
Resize
When Concentric
editing is selected
(see CAD Panel on page 108) the text
box will resize, not the text object.
Relocate
707
Text
When Resize
editing is selected (see
CAD Panel on page 108) both the text
box and the text object will resize.
Sizing Text
Text size can be set on the Text tab of the
Text Specification dialog.
To use the Printed Size Input dialog
This value is subject to the current drawing
scale, derived from the Page Setup dialog.
See Page Setup Dialog on page 898.
Note that text can be sized in two different
ways:
1.
2.
3.
Aligning Text
To align text, select it and click the Align
Left
708
edit
Text Macros
Tab Spacing
edit button.
Using these edit buttons to align text is the
same as using the Alignment drop down box
on the Attributes Tab. See Attributes Tab
on page 713.
The Make Parallel
edit button can be
used to make text parallel with architectural
objects.
Text objects can be aligned with other text
objects using a variety of methods. See
Case Study: Aligning Text on page 791.
2.
3.
Press Ctrl + V to paste the copied materials into the text box; then click OK. The
text object will appear on screen.
4.
Select the text object and note the additional lines with handles separating each
column.
5.
Text Macros
Text macros insert dynamic information
relevant to the current plan or layout file.
Macros are particularly useful in layouts:
page numbers; drawing scale; and
information to identify drawings can be
inserted to improve organization and clarity.
709
Text
button; Center
Text Macros
2.
3.
Macro
Description
%date.short
%date.long
%file.drive
%file.name
%file.dir
%file.ext
%file
%page
4.
%living.area
%room.area
.internal
%room.area
.standard
%room.dim
ensions
%scale
%sheet.size
%time.24
%time
%%
710
Text
Text Tab
1
3
5
2
4
711
712
Depending on the current preference settings, pressing the Enter key will either
force a new line in the text box or close
the dialog. See Text and Page Setup
Panel on page 99.
Attributes Tab
1
2
Text
4
5
713
To create a hyperlink
1.
2.
Link Tab
3.
Specification dialog.
To use a hyperlink
1.
2.
edit
Text Defaults
Select Edit> Default Settings from the
menu. Open Text, Callouts and
714
Arrow Defaults
Arrow Defaults
The settings on the Arrow Defaults dialog
determine the initial settings for arrows
drawn using the Text Line With Arrow
tool and the Line With Arrow
tool. For
more information about the settings in this
dialog, see Arrow Tab on page 735.
715
Text
716
Chapter 31:
Chapter Overview
, and Marker
child buttons.
Chapter Contents
Callouts &
Markers
Callouts
Selecting Callouts
Editing Callouts
Callout Specification Dialog
Markers
Selecting Markers
Editing Markers
Marker Specification Dialog
Callout/Marker Defaults
Select Edit> Default Settings from the
menu to acces callout and marker
defaults. Defaults for callouts and markers
are saved with the plan or layout file.
The default settings for callouts and markers
determine the initial values and settings for
newly placed callouts and markers.
717
Callouts
Select the Callout
child button,
then click in floor plan view where you
would like a callout to be placed. The
Callout Specification dialog will display.
See Callout Specification Dialog on page
719.
Click OK to close the Callout
Specification dialog and the callout will
appear in floor plan view.
Change the pointers direction by selecting the callout and dragging the edit handle appearing just beyond the pointer.
Change a pointer into an arrow by dragging the handle away from the callout.
You can form up to two arrows in this
way. Each arrow will be jointed and
behave the same as a text object arrow.
Selecting Callouts
Using the Select Objects
or Callout
tool, click on the callout to be selected. You
may also group select callouts by holding
down the Shift key and dragging a marquee
around them using the Callout
tool.
Editing Callouts
The text, size, layer, and color of an existing
callout can be changed. Select the Callout
Callout
718
Resizing Callouts
Deleting Callouts
Del
key.
719
Callouts &
Markers
Callout Tab
1
2
3
4
5
720
Attributes Tab
1
2
3
721
Callouts &
Markers
Markers
Markers for Level Lines, Test
Borings and Point Markers can be
placed in floor plan view, cross sections, or
CAD details. Framing Reference Markers
should only be placed in floor plan views.
Selecting Markers
Using the Select Objects
or Marker
Editing Markers
Markers can be selected and edited in a
number of ways.
Deleting Markers
Select one or more markers. Click the Delete
edit button or press the Del key.
Moving Markers
Markers are moved the way text objects are.
See Using the Edit Handles on page 707.
722
Rotating Markers
Any marker can be rotated. Select it, then
grab the handle at the end of the line between
the two rows of text. Drag the handle to
rotate or stretch it. The text will always be
centered along the line.
The Transform/Replicate Object
edit
button can also be used. See Transform/
Replicate Object on page 793.
Marker Tab
1
2
3
4
Callouts &
Markers
Attributes Tab
The Attributes tab for markers is the same
as the Attributes tab for callouts, see
Attributes Tab on page 721.
723
724
Chapter 32:
CAD Objects
Chapter Overview
Chapter Contents
725
CAD
Objects
Center/Radius/End Arc
Press
Tangent/End Arc
button.
on the keyboard.
F2
About Center
Line Tools
Click the Line Tools
parent button
to display its child buttons to the right.
, Input Line
, Line
, North Pointer
, and
726
, Start/
, Input Arc
, Arc
Spline
Click the Spline
button to draw
connected line segments that form a
spline. See Splines on page 744.
Box Tools
With Arrow
Select Objects
, Start/End/On Arc
, Box
, Wall Bridging
, Cross
Box
, and Insulation
child tools are
discussed in detail later in this chapter. See
Box Tools on page 745.
Circle Tools
Click the Circle Tools
parent
button to display its child buttons to the
right.
Line Tools
The Circle
Point Tools
Click the Point Tools
parent button
to display its child buttons to the right.
The Place Point
Marker
, Input Point
, Point
Dimension Tools
Click the Dimension Tools
parent
button to display its child buttons to the
Text Tools
Click the Text Tools
parent button
to display its child buttons to the right.
The text tools are functional in CAD and
Architectural modes.
Text
Callout
, and Marker
are discussed
in the Text chapter. See Text on page 703.
CAD Layer
Click the CAD Layer button to change
the current default CAD layer. See
Current CAD Layer on page 126.
right.
Draw Line
Click the Draw Line
child button,
then drag to draw lines from beginning
to end, just like walls are drawn. Like walls,
a line may be drawn back on itself to erase a
section. If Object Snaps
are enabled,
you can connect the end of two lines or arcs
or a line and an arc together. This new entity
is a polyline, which is simply two or more
lines and/or arcs joining end to end into a
single unit. If one end of the polyline is
connected to the other, it becomes a closed
727
CAD
Objects
Line Tools
Parts
toggle button. See The CAD
Editing Tools on page 764.
1
3
2
4
5
6
The two shapes above appear identical when
unselected. When selected at their left edge,
the polyline on the left reveals that the left
edge is not attached. The polyline on the
right confirms that the left edge is part of the
larger polyline unit.
Input Line
CAD lines can also be created using
absolute values entered using the
keyboard. This method is more precise, but
slower, than using the mouse and is ideal
when the desired length and angle of each
line is known, such as with property lines.
Before any line can be drawn using this
method, a starting point needs to be defined.
If a starting point has not been defined, Chief
Architect will assume a starting point of 0,0.
728
Line Tools
1.
2.
3.
729
CAD
Objects
4.
button again.
child button.
North Pointer
The North Pointer defines the
direction of true north in floor plan
view. If north is not defined, it is assumed to
be straight up. Every bearing is in relation to
north, so establish this direction before
730
N 20d 30' E
S 45' W
N 90' E
Sun Angle
In floor plan view you can create
multiple Sun Angles. Click the Sun
731
CAD
Objects
Angle
child button and click in floor plan
view The Sun Angle Specification
dialog will display. For each sun angle you
place, specify time of year, time of day, and a
location based on longitude and latitude.
Line Tab
732
1
2
3
4
5
733
CAD
Objects
734
Arrow Tab
1
2
3
4
5
6
735
CAD
Objects
Arc Tools
Click the Arc Tools
parent button
to display its child buttons to the right.
Before deciding which arc tool will work
best for the project at hand, it may be helpful
to be familiar with the different components
that make up an arc.
End
Tangent
Start
Radius
Chord
Start/End/On Arc
Click the Start/End/On Arc child
button; click and hold the mouse button
at the start point of the arc; drag to the end
point of the arc; release the mouse button and
move it to adjust the curvature of the arc;
then release the mouse. Once drawn, an arc
can be edited. See Editing Arcs on page
766.
Center/Radius/End Arc
Center
Draw Arc
Click the Draw Arc child button, click
at the arcs start point; drag to draw the
arc; then click again at the end point to
complete the arc. Moving the pointer along
the curve while dragging the arc will cause
the arc to curve accordingly. Once drawn, an
736
Start/Tangent/End Arc
Click the Start/Tangent/End Arc
child button; click at the start of the
arc; drag a line that defines the arcs tangent
at the start point; then release the mouse.
Arcs can be selected and edited using the
handles or opened for specification. See
Editing Arcs on page 766.
Input Arc
An arc can also be drawn to exact
specifications using the New Arc
dialog.
Arc Tools
2.
Start Direction = 0
Chord Direction = 45
4.
5.
3.
CAD
Objects
Chord Length =
282 13/16
Radius = 200
6.
7.
737
child
2.
3.
child button.
738
Arc Tab
CAD
Objects
739
740
Arrow Tab
For information about the Arrow tab, see
Arrow Tab on page 735.
Polylines
Polylines
Closed Polylines
Open Polylines
Specification dialog.
Polyline Tab
741
CAD
Objects
742
Arc Tab
The Arc tab displays when the selected
segment of the polyline is an arc as opposed
to a line. The data here applies to the selected
arc. The currently selected arc displays an
extra handle at its midpoint when selected.
See Arc Tab on page 739.
1
3
5
7
2
4
6
8
9
10
743
CAD
Objects
11
Splines
A Spline is a curve which passes
smoothly through a set of points.
Splines can be selected and opened for
specification. See Polyline Specification
Dialog on page 741.
4.
5.
1.
child button.
2.
Result
to
As drawn
6.
3.
7.
Result
744
Form a closed spline by drawing a segment between its two free ends.
Box Tools
Spline Tab
Draw segment to close
8.
Rectangular Polylines
A Rectangular Polyline begins as a
rectangle, drawn from corner to corner.
Once selected, a rectangular polyline can be
edited into any shape. See Editing Boxes
on page 773.
Boxes
Draw a box from one midpoint to the
midpoint of the opposite side. A box
draws as a square at first and can be reshaped
Framing
Click the Framing
child button to
draw a 1-1/2" (38 mm) wide box of any
length. When dragging the length, the
framing box appears to be a line until the
mouse button is released. Specially designed
to represent general framing materials, the
box can be resized to any specification using
745
CAD
Objects
Box Tools
Wall Bridging
Click the Wall Bridging
child
button to draw wall bridging in a wall
detail. For more information, see Editing
Cross Section/Elevation Views on page
638.
Cross Boxes
The Cross Box behaves the same as a
box. The only difference is the cross
which is automatically drawn whenever this
tool is used. Use the cross box add framing
detail to cross sections.
Insulation
Use the Insulation
tool to draw
insulation in cross section details. Drag
the length of the insulated area, then select
object and use the edit handles to move or
resize it. It may be easier to use the CAD
Box Specification dialog to define the
insulation width and length exactly.
Drag to
create
746
tool is
Result
Select
to edit
General Tab
1
2
747
CAD
Objects
Circle Tools
Click the Circle Tools
parent
button to display its child buttons to the
Snaps
, both the center point and the
radius point will snap to any appropriate
nearby CAD object, intersection or
point.
right.
Draw a Circle by dragging across the
diameter. If a small circle is needed,
draw a larger circle and then resize it.
Use the Circle Specification dialog to
accurately define size, position and other
attributes. You may also fill a circle with a
hatch pattern or solid fill. See CAD Circle/
Oval Specification Dialog on page 748.
2.
3.
tool.
Ovals
An Oval is drawn first as a circle and
then reshaped into an oval.
To use the Oval tool
1.
2.
748
Point Tools
General Tab
CAD
Objects
Point Tools
Click the Point Tools
parent button
to display its child buttons to the right.
Click the Place Point
child button
and click on screen to place a
temporary CAD point in the plan. These
temporary points can be used to accurately
position other CAD objects.
Input Point
A new point can be placed using
absolute coordinates as well.
749
2.
3.
Point Markers
Use a permanent Point Marker as a
snap point for dimension lines and
other CAD objects. Click the Point Marker
child button and click in the view to
place a permanent point marker. Point
markers are one of the available types of
markers that display as a simple cross, with
or without a text label. They can be opened
for specification and modified to include a
label or to alter their display attributes.
You can also place point markers using the
Marker
tool, which will allow you to
specify the marker label and type when
placed. See Markers on page 722.
Temporary Points
Temporary points are used for snapping
objects. These may be added manually or the
program may add them automatically, such
as when the Input Line
or Input Point
750
, Input Arc
Point Tools
tool.
751
CAD
Objects
Current
Point
752
CAD Blocks
CAD Blocks
Make Block
Create a CAD block by selecting
multiple CAD and text objects, then
click on the Make Block
edit button that
appears on the Edit toolbar. The new block
acts like a single CAD object. CAD blocks
can contain other CAD blocks, referred to
these are called "Nested" CAD blocks.
When creating a new block from a group of
CAD objects, two things are actually created.
A block definition, which holds all of the
items in a group is created, as well as a block
instance that displays the block at a position,
orientation and size that matches that of the
items in the original group. More instances
of the new block are made by copying the
first instance. Any copy can be repositioned,
resized and rotated independently of any
other block instance.
For a single plan file, these instances share
the same definition regardless of which floor
or CAD detail in which they appear. Copying
a block instance to a completely different
plan file also copies the block definition to
that plan.
Select a block instance by clicking on any
one of its components. It moves, rotates and
resizes much like a CAD box. Drag from a
corner to resize the block proportionately.
Drag from a side handle to resize in only one
dimension. Resizing each dimension
Explode Block
Click on any item in a single block to
select the block. When a single block is
selected, click the Explode Block
button
to break it back into its individual
components. You cannot explode a block by
using a marquee to select it: you must click it
to select it.
If the block is composed of other blocks,
exploding the outermost block will break it
down into the component blocks. Note that
the block definition is not exploded or
changed, just the instance.
753
CAD
Objects
754
1
4
755
CAD
Objects
756
4.
5.
1.
2.
3.
edit but-
757
CAD
Objects
6.
Dimensions
For detailed information about using
the Manual Dimension tool,
seeDimensions on page 681. There are
several things to remember when
dimensioning CAD objects.
758
Make sure that CAD objects are displayed in the current view. Dimensions
will not look for CAD objects that are not
displayed. If CAD objects are turned off
and do not display, related dimensions
will not display either. See Dimension
Fonts on page 682.
Automatic dimensions do not work in
CAD mode. Dimensions must be manually drawn.
CAD
Objects
CAD Details
759
Special Details
Some CAD details are created automatically
by the system. If you have any roof trusses in
your plan, a diagram of each truss type used
760
Plan Footprint
6.
DN
DECK
15'8 x 9'7
30" GE
electric
cooktop
DN
KITCHEN
12'4 x 10'5
DINING
Allow 39"
for ref.
12'4 x 13'5
Double
electric
oven
LIVING
15'6 x 25'2
HALL
2'6 x 6'5
NOOK
10'3 x 9'5
UP
DN
HALL
4'8 x 31'10
CLOSET
2'2 x 7'2
FAMILY
13'1 x 19'1
UP
UP
DN
GARAGE
22'7 x 27'5
BATH
6'6 x 5'6
PORCH
UP
15'7 x 5'6
DN
3.
4.
From the CAD Detail select CAD> Special> Plan Footprint from the menu.
The Plan Footprint dialog will open.
5.
DN
Plan Footprint
761
CAD
Objects
2.
762
Layer Display
Options Dialog
The items that display in a Plan Footprint can
be controlled using the Layer Display
Options dialog. See Layer Display
Options Dialog on page 119.
Chapter 33:
Chapter Contents
763
CAD
Editing
Chapter Overview
Edit Handles
The edit handles that display when a CAD
object is selected are similar to the edit
handles that display when architectural
objects are selected. See Editing Selected
Objects on page 10. The edit handles
behave uniquely for a few of the CAD
objects. Any unique editing behaviors are
covered in this chapter by object.
Toggle Buttons
Toggle buttons are essentially shortcuts to
global settings in the Preferences dialog
and plan settings in the Plan Defaults and
the Layout Defaults dialogs.
Color On/Off - Toggles the display of
color. See Color Off/On on page 632.
Display Temporary Dimensions Toggles the display of temporary
dimensions, which appear when objects are
selected. See Display Temporary
Dimensions on page 685.
Edit Polyline Parts - Toggles the
ability to edit individual line segments
of polylines. See Edit Polyline Parts on
page 786.
Display Arc Centers - Toggles the
display of arc centers. See Preferences
- Line Properties Panel on page 778.
Display Reference Grid - Toggles the
reference grid display, as specified in
the Plan Defaults/Layout Defaults dialog.
See Plan Defaults on page 91.
Angle Snaps - Enables snapping to
allowed angles as specified in the Plan
Defaults/Layout Defaults dialog. See Plan
Defaults on page 91.
764
Status Bar
The status bar displays the current CAD
layer as well as the CAD coordinates of the
pointer. See Appearance Panel on page 94.
tool. Clicking
tool is
765
CAD
Editing
Editing Lines
Select a line or line with arrow to enable the
possible edit functions.
Move
If Angle Snaps
toggle button is off,
the end of the line can be dragged anywhere, including off of allowed angles.
Change Line/Arc
A line section of a polyline can be changed to
an arc. Select the polyline by the line section
and click the Change Line/Arc
edit
button. For more information, see Change
Line/Arc on page 796.
Reversing a Line
Select a line then click the Reverse
Direction
edit button to reverse its
direction. Reversing a line is useful with
certain line styles or with an arrow at one
end. See Reverse Direction on page 796.
Editing Arcs
Select an arc to enable the possible edit
functions.
766
Editing Arcs
Resize
(changes radius)
Reshape
(moves center)
Move
The end edit handles will expand or contract the arc when moved along the arcs
radius. If you follow the path of the arc,
the end edit handles will allow you to
adjust the arc length.
767
CAD
Editing
Change Line/Arc
An arc section of a polyline can be
changed to a straight line. Select the
polyline by the arc section and click the
Change Line/Arc edit button. For more
information, see Change Line/Arc on page
796.
Editing Splines
Select a spline to enable the spline editing
functions.
Vertex
Move
Rotate
The spline on the right illustrates the edit handles
that display when Advanced Splines is turned on
768
Editing Splines
Vertex
Change the shape of the spline by clicking and dragging the control handles.
Control handle
Advanced Splines
Select a spline and click the Advanced
Splines edit button to turn on advanced
splines for the selected spline. When
Advanced Splines is turned on additional
edit handles display. These edit handles are
called control handles and allow you to
Control
Handles
Result
769
CAD
Editing
Result
Adding a Vertex
You can add a vertex to a spline by selecting
the spline, clicking the Break Line
edit
button and clicking on the spline. A vertex
will be added at the point where you clicked.
The spline will remain selected and you will
see the additional vertex and control handles.
Result
770
Result
Editing Polylines
Converting Splines
into Polylines
Converting Polylines
into Splines
Editing Polylines
Select a rectangular polyline or any multiple
sided polyline to enable the edit functions.
Vertex
CAD
Editing
Reshape
771
Using Dimensions
Dimensions can be used to reshape polylines
in the same way that dimensions can be used
to position walls and other architectural
objects. See Moving a CAD Object Using
Dimensions on page 690.
772
Editing Boxes
Editing Boxes
Select a box, cross box, or insulation box to
enable the edit functions.
Rotate
Move
CAD
Editing
Reshape
773
Parallel
edit button. The entire box
will rotate. See Make Parallel/Perpendicular on page 796.
and Extend
Objects
edit buttons to clip or
lengthen intersecting CAD objects. See
Trim and Extend on page 799.
Make an edge of a box parallel or perpendicular to another object using the Make
Resize
A Circle
can only be a circle. It cannot
be edited into any other shapes.
Concentric Resize
Oval
For a perfect oval, place a circle, select
it, click the Make Block edit button,
then resize the CAD block. See CAD Blocks
on page 753.
Move
Resize
Circle
774
The four edit handles beyond the perimeter are concentric resize edit handles.
Move them in or out to resize the circle/
oval without moving the center.
Note: The behavior of the resize handle will
depend on the current edit type mode. See
Edit Types on page 786
and Extend
Objects
edit buttons to clip or
lengthen intersecting CAD objects. See
Trim and Extend on page 799.
The Transform/Replicate
edit button can be used to perform a variety of
powerful edit functions. See Transform/
Replicate Object on page 793.
775
CAD
Editing
776
Rotate about
Object Center
Rotate about
Current Point
Resize About
Current Point
777
CAD
Editing
Concentric
Resize
Checked
Unchecked
option defines
the angular constraint for any new CAD
object being drawn. Keep it set to 15 Degree
Increments unless Unrestricted is
necessary. It is easier to drag a horizontal or
vertical line when restricted to 15 degree
angles. See Angle Snap Settings on page
785.
778
1
2
3
4
Fractional Degrees
779
CAD
Editing
780
781
CAD
Editing
Quadrant snaps
Tangent extension
On object snaps
Perpendicular extension
Orthogonal extension
782
Indicators.
Object Snapping
Object Snapping
When editing CAD objects, it is often
important to position objects exactly relative
to each other. For example, it is frequently
necessary to position lines so that their
endpoints are coincident.
Extension lines
783
CAD
Editing
Object Snaps
allow you to snap CAD
objects to other objects, such as other CAD
objects, walls, cabinets, or fixtures. Object
snapping is indicated visually as you create
or edit CAD objects, and has the highest
priority over all other types of snapping in
Chief Architect. Clicking the Object Snaps
2.
3.
4.
5.
4.
5.
1.
3.
The S key can help establish extension
snaps when other objects may interfere
Angle Snapping
Sometimes it is important that objects
be drawn at exact angles. In Chief
Architect this can be accomplished using
Angle Snaps. Angle Snapping allows you to
snap at either 15 degree angles, 7.5 degree
angles, or any other specified angle. Angle
snapping allows you to draw lines, walls, and
other objects at specified angles. Angle snaps
784
Grid Snapping
Angle Snapping
and Object Snapping
Angle snapping takes a lower priority to
object snapping. If a valid object snap exists,
Grid Snapping
the Plan Defaults dialog. See Plan
Defaults on page 91.
CAD
Editing
785
and
on.
Edit Types
There are four CAD editing modes that affect
object behavior as object corners are
dragged. These modes can be accessed
through the CAD panel of the Preferences
786
Edit Types
Fillet
Fillet mode allows you to add a fillet at
any corner of an object. Dragging the
corner will allow you to adjust the fillet
radius at that corner.
Using the Fillet edit type on a box will cause
all the corners to adjust at once. The radius of
each corner is the same.
Move Corners
Move Corners is the default edit type
for closed polylines. Move Corners
allows you to adjust any corner of a polyline,
without resizing the rest of the polyline. The
edge you select restricts how the corner will
move For boxes and several other types of
CAD objects where the corners cannot be
moved individually, this tool will work the
787
CAD
Editing
Resize
Concentric
Concentric mode allows you to resize
objects such that the distance moved by
each object edge is the same as all other
object edges. For example, Concentric mode
can be used to resize an irregularly shaped
polyline such that each edge is exactly one
foot in from the original position. This can be
useful in many siuations, such as creating
boundary line setbacks for lots.
Normally, resizing an object using
Concentric mode will adjust the object so
that each edge moves using the Snap Grid
Units. For example, if your grid unit is set to
1 foot, then resizing the corner of an
irregularly shaped polyline will allow you to
move each edge in (or out) from the original
position by 1 ft., 2 ft., 3 ft., and so forth.
However, in concentric mode, Snap Grid
Units can be overridden. If you double-click
on the Concentric mode toolbar button, you
can access the CAD preferences, where the
Concentric Jump value can be set. When this
value is set, dragging the corners of an object
will use the jump value instead of the snap
grid value. Alternatively, if you set the jump
788
Copying Concentrically
Concentric copies of an object can be
made in concentric mode using the
Copy/Paste edit button.
Select an object and click the Copy/Paste
edit button. Drag a corner of the selected
object. The original object remains
unchanged and a concentric copy is created.
Rotate/Resize About
Current Point
The Rotate/Resize About edit type
allows you to define the point about
which an object or a group of objects will
rotate or resize. See Preferences - CAD
Panel on page 776.
Click Method
Select the item or group of items to be
moved, click the Point to Point Move
edit button, then click at a start point, not
necessarily on the object to be moved, and
then click on the end point. The items will be
moved by the distance and direction between
the two points. You can use object snaps to
precisely position the start and end points.
Drag Method
You may also click on the start point, then
drag to the end point while holding the left
789
CAD
Editing
Move to Front
Click the Move To Front edit button to
move the selected object in front of
other CAD objects.
Accurate Move
Select an object and click the Accurate
Move edit button to slow down the
movement of the object with the mouse. This
can be useful for precisely moving and
resizing objects. This edit button is available
for many architectural objects such as walls,
windows, and stairs.
Copying
Point to Point Move
edit button
Point-to-Point Move
The Point to Point Move edit button
allows a selected CAD object or group
of CAD objects) to be accurately moved.
There are two different ways to use the same
tool, each method producing a different
result. See Point-to-Point Move with Edit
Area on page 819.
790
Curved Items
Affect CAD Stops
Arcs as polyline edges, circles and curved
walls stop CAD moves of the same, as well
To align text
791
CAD
Editing
792
Multiple Copy
The Multiple Copy tool makes it easy
to lay out multiple copies of any CAD
object or group of CAD objects, including
CAD blocks.
To use multiple copy
1.
2.
3.
Release the mouse button to place copies. The distance of drag will determine
the number of copies placed.
CAD objects
Rafters
Transform/Replicate Object
Transform/Replicate Object
CAD
Editing
793
1
2
3
4
5
6
794
Delete
whatever is selected. The Del key on
the keyboard also works the same way.
795
CAD
Editing
Reverse Direction
Select a line, arrow, or polyline, then
click the Reverse Direction edit button
to reverse the direction. Reversing a line or
Change Line/Arc
Select an arc or line segment of a
polyline and click the Change Line/
Arc edit button to convert the selected
segement to a line or an arc.
Make Parallel/Perpendicular
The Make Parallel edit button is an
alignment tool. Any CAD line; straight
edge of a CAD block; framing member;
polyline edge or roof plane edge can be made
parallel or perpendicular to another straight
edge.
Click button
796
Select edge
Result
Make Parallel/Perpendicular
Arcs
The Make Parallel
edit button affects
arcs in two different ways, depending on
which part of the arc is selected. The arc is
divided into three equal selection areas: the
two outer thirds, and the center third.
Selecting near either of the ends (in the outer
third) affects that end. Selecting the arc in the
center third affects the center point.
If you select the arc on either end (in the
outer third), the Make Parallel
edit
button will extend or contract the free end of
the arc along the arc until the tangent at that
end is parallel/perpendicular to a second item
which could be a straight wall or CAD
object. Just click on the arc near the desired
end, then click on the Make Parallel
edit
button, then click on the second item. The
selected arc end will extend or contract if it is
already within about 20 degrees of being
tangent or perpendicular to the second item.
This method can also be used to adjust the
end direction for curved stairs.
Make Parallel
edit button will move the
arc so that its center coincides with the center
of a nearby curved wall, arc or circle. Just
click in the middle third of an arc, then on the
Make Parallel
edit button, and finally
click on a nearby arc, circle or curved wall,
and the first arc will move so that its center
coincides with that of the second item. The
radius of the arc will not change.
797
CAD
Editing
Break Line
The Break Line tool adds a complete
or partial break in a line or polyline
edge. It will not break items created with the
Circle
, Oval
Insulation
, Box
, Spline
, or Cross Box
tools.
Creating Breaks
A complete break means that the line is
totally severed at that point. A partial break
means that a joint has been added to the line
or polyline, and that joint can be used to
change the shape of the polyline if Move
Corners is selected on the CAD panel of the
Preferences dialog, but the sections are
still part of the same polyline unit.
Framing members are always completely
broken when a break is added. You cannot
add a partial break to a framing member.
To partially break a line (add
a joint for reshaping), select
the line, click the Break
Line
edit button, then
click the location for the
Singlebreak. If there is a nearby
click
point or intersecting line or
arc on the item to be broken,
the break location will snap to that point or
798
Result
. Select
Extend Objects
Lines, arcs, polylines or framing items
may also be extended. The boundary to
which the items will be extended may be any
CAD object or group of CAD objects. It may
even be a CAD block.
First select the boundary items, the ones to
which the CAD objects will be extended.
Then click on the Extend Objects
edit
button. Finally, select the part of the item to
be extended. You may repeat this final step
as many times as desired. Right click or hit
the Esc key to terminate this process.
799
CAD
Editing
Extend Object
Select/Make Fence
or
Fence
tool in a slightly different manner.
In this case, you will first select the line(s)
defining the boundary (for Extend Objects
) or the cut line (for Trim Objects
).
800
Lines
or Chamfer Two Lines
mode. Either way, the Fillet radius and
Chamfer distance values specified will be
the default values used until you choose to
change them. There is no need to keep
defining the same value over and over.
Define it once, use it multiple times.
A value of 0 for either tool will cause the two
lines to meet at a sharp corner.
Lines
can also be used to eliminate parts
of a polyline. To use, fillet or chamfer two
non-adjacent lines that are in the same closed
polyline.
CAD
Editing
Two Lines
and Chamfer Two Lines
buttons become visible, double-click on
either button. The Fillet/Chamfer dialog
will open. Type in the desired values.
801
Polyline Union
Use the Polyline Union
edit button
to combine two or more polylines into
a single polyline.
edit button.
Single Select:
1.
2.
edit
3.
4.
Group Select:
The example shows three closed polylines
and the single closed polyline which resulted
when all three were merged using the Polyline Union
2.
3.
edit button.
802
1.
Polyline Intersection
Use the Polyline Intersection
edit
button to create a single polyline from
the overlap area of two or more closed
polylines.
Polyline Intersection
edit button.
2.
3.
4.
2.
3.
CAD
Editing
edit
803
1.
2.
3.
4.
A new polyline will be created by subtracting the second polyline from the
first. The new polyline will be of the
same type (counter top, lot perimeter,
etc.) as the polyline selected first.
Polyline Subtract
Use the Polyline Subtract
edit
button to subtract one closed polyline
from another to create a third. The Polyline
Subtract
tool appears on the Edit
toolbar when you select a closed polyline.
This
polyline
This
polyline
Originals
804
Converting Polylines
into Special Polylines
Lines, polylines, splines, and boxes can
be turned into special polylines such as
counter tops, slabs, landings, material list
polylines, molding polylines, roof/ceiling
holes, polyline solids, and many terrain
objects.
Converting Special
Polylines into Polylines
Special polylines can be converted to
plain polylines. Select the special
polyline and click the Convert to Plain
Polyline
edit button. This can be used to
convert a counter top to a plain polyline and
then to a slab.
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
13
15
12
14
16
17
18
19
20
21
805
CAD
Editing
498.
503.
806
Chapter 34:
Advanced Design
& Editing
Chapter Overview
Chapter Contents
Time Tracker
Time Log Dialog
House Wizard
Spell Check
Plan Check
IRC Checklist
Select Same / Load Same
Edit Area Tools
Point-to-Point Move with Edit Area
Reflect About Line with Edit Area
Copy/Paste with Edit Area
Delete Objects
Rotate View
Reverse Plan
Advanced
Design
807
Time Tracker
The Time Tracker tools allow you to
monitor the time spent on each plan. Start
and end times can be entered each time a
plan is opened and closed and can be added
and edited as needed. Time Tracker
information is stored with each plan and can
be printed or exported.
Control how the Time Tracker functions on
the Time Tracker panel of the Preferences
dialog. See Time Tracker Panel on page
109.
808
button to open
3
4
5
809
Advanced
Design
House Wizard
Editing Rooms
810
edit button.
Spell Check
Build House
When the rooms are in place, select Tools>
House Wizard> Build House to convert the
rooms into a building model.
Spell Check
The Spell Check feature can be
accessed in the Text Specification
dialog or by selecting Tools> Spell Check
Advanced
Design
811
1
2
3
5
Note: New words can be added to any dictionary file; however, if Chief Architect is uninstalled and reinstalled, only additions to the
User Dictionary, userdic.tlx, will be retained.
Words added to other dictionary files will not
be saved.
812
Plan Check
Plan Check
Plan Check Dialog
813
Advanced
Design
IRC Checklist
Chief Architect includes the
International Code Councils IRC
Checklist, a comprehensive list of
standard building codes which can greatly
facilitate your planning; design; and plan
approval processes.
814
815
Advanced
Design
edit button.
Edit Area
Select Edit> Edit Area> Edit Area
and drag a rectangular marquee
around the area of the plan to be edited.
816
Visible
, the same actions will be taken
for all floors of your plan file.
The Edit Area tools can affect widespread changes across an entire plan
and should always be used with caution.
Moving an Area
817
Advanced
Design
Floors)
Allowed Angles
If more than one percent of the straight walls
selected with Edit Area or Edit Area All
Floors marquee are not at an allowed angle,
To move the area an exact distance, set the
Snap unit to that value before moving the
area. The Snap unit may be as high as 48, or
1200 mm. To move an area a distance greater
than that amount, move it in two or more
steps: set the Snap unit set to 48 and move
the area to within 48" of its new location;
then set the snap unit again to precisely move
the area into place.
Place at
Allowed Angles Dialog
Rotating an Area
818
Deleting an Area
When an area is defined using Edit Area
, click the Delete
edit button to delete
everything in the selection set.
Select Edit> Edit Area> Edit Area (All
Floors)
and click the Delete
edit
button to delete all items in the selection area
on all floors of your model.
tool.
2.
3.
4.
edit button.
tool
edit button.
5.
Click Method
Define an Edit Area by dragging the
rectangular selection marquee. Select the
Point-to-Point Move
edit button; click
at a starting point; and then click at the end
point to move to. The selected area will be
moved the distance and direction defined by
the two points. Use CAD points or other snap
points to place the selection set accurately.
Drag Method
If you click and drag while using the Pointto-Point Move
edit button, the move
will be restricted by the Allowed Angles
defined in the Plan Defaults dialog.
Define an Edit Area by dragging the
rectangular selection marquee; select the
Point-to-Point Move
edit button; click
at a starting point; and drag the pointer to an
end point while holding down the mouse
button. The selected area will be moved the
distance and direction defined by the drag.
If you hold down the Ctrl key before dragging
the selected area, it will move as if you had
used the Click Method described above.
819
Advanced
Design
Copying
3.
1.
2.
edit button.
tool.
Copy Restrictions
When copying into the same plan, the
distance between the center of the original
area and the center of the copied area must be
more than half the width or height of the
area. This prevents a copy being placed on
top of the original.
820
Copy - Drag
Select an Edit Area; click the Copy/Paste
edit button; and drag from the center of
the selected area to position the copy at its
new location. Position the copy accurately
with respect to its original position by
watching the readout of the moved distance
in the Status Bar at the bottom of the screen.
Copy - Click
The Copy/Paste
edit button can also be
used to place a copy by clicking in the same
or in a different plan.
Delete Objects
Hold Position
When copying between different
floors of the same plan, place a copy
exactly over or under the original by clicking
the Hold Position
Delete Objects
Use the Delete Objects
feature to
delete all objects of a specified type,
such as cabinets or electrical, in one room;
on the current floor; or in the entire plan.
1.
Advanced
Design
821
5.
6.
2.
3.
4.
Rotate View
To rotate a floor plan view, select
Tools> Rotate View...
to open the
822
Reverse Plan
Reverse Plan
The Reverse Plan tool is a quick way
to mirror a plan so that everything is
swapped left to right.
Select Tools> Reverse Plan
to reflect an
entire plan right to left about a vertical line.
Reverse Plan reverses all floors associated
with the current floor.
Advanced
Design
823
824
Pictures, Images,
& Movies
Chapter Overview
Chief Architect can save any view in a wide
variety of picture file formats. Picture files
can also be imported into Chief Architect and
displayed in most views for a variety of
applications.
Chief Architect also contains many images
of real world objects such as trees, plants,
people, vehicles, etc. in the Library Browser.
Images are actual objects that can be edited
in a variety of ways.
Chief Architect allows you to create virtual
tours that can be saved, shared with others,
and played back later.
Chief Architect can also generate a POV-ray
file from a 3D view for photo-realistic
rendering capabilities. The POV-ray feature
is covered in its own chapter, see
Raytracing on page 673.
Chapter Contents
825
Images &
Movies
Chapter 35:
PNG)
to insert a picture file into a plan.
The Import Picture File dialog will open
and allow you to browse to a picture file on
your computer.
826
Images &
Movies
3
4
Importing Backdrops
Backdrops can be directly imported into the
Library Browser from anywhere on your
computer. See Adding Backdrops to the
Library on page 569.
Resize Factor
1.
827
2.
Resize Picture
A selected picture can be resized in
either the X or Y direction with the
Resize Picture tool.
3.
4.
1.
5.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
edit
7.
8.
828
Images &
Movies
1
2
3
4
1 Navigate to the desired directory.
2 The pictures which exist in the current
directory display here.
829
1
2
830
Creating Images
Options.
Creating Images
2D Images that represent real world
objects can be used to enhance 3D
views. Images have the advantage of making
3D views and renderings more realistic
without adding many surfaces to the model.
For example, a realistic tree image can be
used instead of a tree symbol that might have
thousands of surfaces. This can dramatically
improve realism without compromising
drawing time.
An image is not the same as a picture file.
See Picture Files vs. Image Objects on
page 826. For a picture file to become an
image it must be associated with a CAD
Block (for floor plan view representation)
and must have width and height data
associated with it. Once assigned, this data
will be saved with the image in the Library
Browser.
To create an image from a picture file:
1.
3.
4.
5.
6.
831
Images &
Movies
7.
Converting a
Folder of Images
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.
2.
3.
Placing Images
Select Library> Image Library or
click the Image Library toolbar
button. The Library Browser opens to the
Images directory. Select an image from the
Viewing Images
An image consists of a two-dimensional
picture file, an associated CAD Block, and
width and height data. Depending on which
type of view is current, the image will appear
differently, or may not appear at all.
832
In Layout
The symbols representing images in floor
plan view, whether 2D symbols or CAD
blocks, can be displayed on a layout sheet
and can be printed or plotted.
Copying Images
Copying the 2D symbol in floor plan view
copies the attached picture within a plan or to
another plan. Multiple images can be copied
simultaneously, either within the same plan
or between plans. The relationship between
the images is maintained in the copy.
Moving Images
Images can be selected and moved in both
floor plan view and 3D views. When selected
in floor plan view, the move handle
allows you to relocate the image. The
elevation of an image cannot be changed in
floor plan view.
In a 3D view, the image can be selected by
clicking anywhere in the rectangular border
Resizing an Image
Images can be resized in either 2D or 3D
views. When either the height or the width is
changed, the rest of the image resizes
proportionally.
edit button.
833
Images &
Movies
Copying Images
tool is used.
834
Images &
Movies
Image Tab
1
3
5
4
6
835
Transparency Tab
1
3
836
Windows Metafiles
Images &
Movies
Layer Tab
For information about using the Layer tab,
see Layer Tab on page 123.
Windows Metafiles
A Windows Metafile (.wmf) is a special file
format that is made up of vectors (lines) that
allow the image to be rescaled without loss
of quality. High resolution pictures can be
exported as a Windows Metafile.
837
Enhanced Metafiles
Walkthroughs
A recorded 3D Walkthrough is a series of
picture files saved in .avi format, which can
be opened by other applications such as
Windows Media Player.
Recording a Walkthrough
Click the Walkthrough Recording
Tools parent button to display the
child buttons to the right.
Record Walkthrough - Click this
button from a 3D view to begin
recording a walkthrough.
Stop Recording - Click this button to
stop recording the walkthrough. This
closes the walkthrough file.
Pause Recording - Click this button to
pause the recording of a walkthrough.
When paused, you can change the camera
838
2.
3.
4.
5.
sion Percent and click OK. See Walkthrough Options Dialog on page 839.
Use the camera movement tools to create additional views. Each time the
screen redraws, that view is recorded as
the next frame in sequence. See Editing
a Camera in 3D Views on page 627.
1.
Recording
6.
click Open.
3.
4.
button.
Playing a Walkthrough
A Walkthrough file can be played by
clicking the Play Walkthrough button.
This will open the Open Movie File dialog
and allow you to browse to an .avi on your
computer. Your default video
839
Images &
Movies
Walkthroughs
VRML
VRML (Virtual Reality Modeling
Language) is a 3D file format that can be
imported by various walkthrough viewers
as well as other rendering packages. An
exported VRML file contains the entire 3D
model with texture, image, and lighting
. The
2
4
6
8
5
7
840
841
Images &
Movies
VRML
842
Chapter 36:
DXF/DWG
DXF/DWG
Chapter Overview
Chief Architect allows you to import and
export files from, and to, other plans, or even
other CAD programs. Importing is the
process of opening a file in Chief Architect
which was produced in a different program.
Exporting is the process of saving a file in a
format that can be read by another program.
Chapter Contents
Compatibility
DXF vs. DWG
CAD to Walls
Importing 2D DXF/DWG Files
Additional 2D Import Information
Exporting 2D DXF/DWG Files
Additional 2D Export Information
Exporting a 3D DXF/DWG Model
Compatibility
Importing
Chief Architect supports import of the
following:
3D faces
Exporting
Lightweight Polylines
843
Dimensions
Chief Architect supports the import and
export of aligned, rotated, and angular
dimensions. Imported dimensions which are
CAD to Walls
This feature allows you to convert a flat line
drawing into a 3D model. Once a drawing
has been imported into Chief Architect,
double CAD lines which represent wall
844
view; Cross
view; or a CAD
Select File
DXF/DWG
1
2
3
845
Select Layers
2
1
3
Sspecify which layers you want to import.
846
DXF/DWG
Layer Mapping
1
2
3
4
5
847
848
DXF/DWG
1
2
3
4
849
3
1
4
2
If you chose the fourth option from the
Duplicate CAD Block dialog the
Advanced Duplicate CAD Block
850
DXF/DWG
Drawing Unit
1
3
Import Complete
Note: During the import process, Chief Architect defaults to inches or millimeters. If you
are importing a site plan or topo prepared by
a surveyor, or if you are importing a metric
drawing into an imperial plan (or vice versa),
you might need to change the units.
851
852
DXF/DWG
2
3
4
5
6
10
7
9
11
13
15
12
14
853
854
DXF/DWG 2D View
Sometimes a flat 2D DXF is needed from a
3D view, such as an elevation, camera view
or overview. When the desired 3D view is on
screen with the desired items displayed,
choose File> Export> Current View. Give
the file a name and save in the desired
location.
Before creating the file, turn off the color
(Window> Color Off) in the 3D view
so that only lines show. This reveals which
lines will be visible in the exported file.
Note: Uncheck "Use Associative Dimensions" in the Export Drawing File dialog
if the CAD program you are using does not
support AutoCAD Associative dimensions.
See Export Drawing File on page 853.
Line Type
A line type is used by layers and entities to
determine how lines are drawn. Chief
Architect line types are supported on export.
Layers
Layers in other systems are similar to Chief
Architect layers. However, there are some
855
DXF/DWG
Other Systems
Name
Name
Color
Display
On
Size
Style
Line type
Lock
Lock
856
Chief Architect
Surface / Object
Appliance
Cabinet Door
Cabinet Box
Cabinet Counter Top
Cabinet Glass
Soffit
A-CEIL-MAIN
A-CEIL-SLOP
A-DOOR-STND
A-EQPM-DOOR
A-EQPM-HDWR
A-FIXT-GLAS
A-FIXT-MAIN
A-FLOR-BAY
A-FLOR-MAIN
A-FOOT-FOOT
A-FRAM-CEIL
A-FRAM-DECK
A-FRAM-GENL
A-FRAM-JOIS
A-FRAM-ROOF
A-FRAM-TRUS
A-FRAM-WALL
A-FURN-MAIN
A-GLAZ-DOOR
A-GLAZ-WIND
A-HRAL-BAL
A-HRAL-BLST
A-HRAL-NWEL
A-HRAL-RAIL
A-CASE-CABD
A-MASN-FIRE
A-NONE-NONE
A-PLAT-RIM
A-RISR-MAIN
A-ROOF-EAVE
A-ROOF-FASC
A-ROOF-MAIN
A-STRS-RUNR
A-STRS-TRED
A-STRS-UNDR
A-WALL-BAY
Stair Bottom
Bay / Bow Window
Wall
A-WALL-EXTW Corner Board
A-WALL-MAIN Wall
A-WALL-PAPE
Wallcovering
A-WALL-PONY Pony Wall
A-WDWK-EXTR Exterior Door /
Window Trim
A-WDWKExterior Sash
EXTTRIM
A-WDWK-MOLD Molding
A-WDWK-SHLF Shelf
A-WDWK-TRIM Interior Door /
Window Trim
C-PROP-CURB
Curb
C-PROP-ROAD
Road
C-PROP-TERA
Terrain
C-PROP-TRFE
Terrain Feature
C-PROP-TRSK
Terrain Skirt
E-ELEC-TRIM
Electrical
DXF Code
Each layer name exported can include a DXF
Code from the materials used for items on
that layer. If a material has been specified for
an item and appears on the surface of the
item, the DXF code for the material is
included in the layer name. This DXF Code
is specified on the General tab of the Plan
Material dialog.
These codes are specified in the Plan
Material dialog for each Chief Architect
material. As you add new materials in this
dialog, you can specify an appropriate DXF
code for each.
857
DXF/DWG
A-CASE-TOEA
A-CEIL-BAY
858
Chapter 37:
Symbol
Wizard
Overview
Chief Architect provides a complete set of
architectural tools for highly customized
design. In addition, the Library Browser
contains a vast supply of objects that can be
used to add more detail to a plan. For
everything else, theres the Create Symbol
Wizard. With the ability to make your own
symbols, the amount of detail that can be
added to a plan is limitless.
With the Create Symbol Wizard, you can
import 3D objects and convert them into 3D
symbols for use within Chief Architect. You
can also modify existing library symbols.
This chapter guides you through the process
of creating a symbol in Chief Architect using
the Create Symbol Wizard. Adding
symbols to the library; editing them; and
placing them in a plan are covered in the
Libraries chapter, see Libraries on page
563.
Chapter Contents
Importing 3D Data
Opening the Create Symbol Wizard
Selecting the Symbol Category
Loading the 3D File
2D Block
Symbol Options
Sizing
Plant Information
Plant Attributes
Plant Description
Materials
Openings
Floor Plan View
Closing the Create Symbol Wizard
Symbol Specification Dialog
859
Importing 3D Data
Creating a symbol that can be used by Chief
Architect is a relatively simple process which
begins with previously created 3D data.
More than likely, this 3D data will have
come from a program other than Chief
Architect. If another 3D modeling program is
used to create the 3D data, be aware of the
following requirements before attempting to
create symbols.
Chief Architect is not able to provide
support for any third party software.
860
The face data should be assigned to different layers so that you can map them to
the correct materials when viewing them
in 3D. It is helpful to name your layers
using a convention that identifies which
materials should be assigned to each subcomponent.
Surface Normals
If you will be using third party software to
help you create the .dxf /.dwg/.obj files that
will be turned into symbols, you should be
familiar with the concept of surface normals.
A surface normal is a vector
which is perpendicular to
the plane of a surface. This
vector points in one
direction, determined by the
way the face is drawn.
If the face is drawn
clockwise, the surface normals are directed
outward, if the face is drawn counterclockwise, the surface normals will point
inward.
861
Symbol
Wizard
2
1 Category - Choose a category. This
Item Type
Placement Affect
Appliances
(built-in base cabs)
Appliances
(under wall cabs)
Cooktops
Ovens (built-in)
Refrigerators
(built-in)
Sinks (bathroom)
Sinks (kitchen)
Sinks (laundry)
862
Symbol
Wizard
2
3
4
5
6
9
10
863
Origin Locations
6 Specify Origin - The origin of an
864
Origin location
Furniture
Fixture
Electrical Floor
Items
Electrical
Wall
Items
Electrical Ceiling
Windows
Cabinet Door
Doors
Doorways
Symbol Type
865
Symbol
Wizard
2D Block
Most 3D objects require 2D representation in
floor plan view. 2D CAD blocks are not
required for Windows, Doors, Cabinet
Doors, and Doorways.
1
5
2
866
2D Block
Symbol
Wizard
867
Symbol Options
2
3
868
Available Options
The following table lists each of the options
that are available and how this option will
affect the behavior of the symbol:
Symbol Options
3-Way
Categories
Electrical
Electrical
4-Way
Appears
in
appliance
schedule
Appears
in
HVAC schedule
Appears
in
plumbing
schedule
Breaker Panel
Can sit on base
cabinet or table
Ceiling
Mounted
Doorbell
Fan
Fixture
Fixture
Fixture
Electrical
Fixtures,
Furniture,
Electrical
Electrical
Electrical
Electrical
Fixtures
Floor Mounted
Electrical
GFCI
Electrical
Hangs on wall
Fixtures and
Furniture
Effect on Symbol
If a 110V or 220V item is on a wall and you select Build>
Electrical> Auto Place Outlets
, an outlet will not be
placed in that area.
Check this box to make an electrical symbol a 3-way
switch.
Check this box to make an electrical symbol a 4-way
switch.
Check this box to make this fixture appear in the Appliance Schedule.
Check this box to make this fixture appear in the HVAC
Schedule.
Check this box to make this fixture appear in the Plumbing Schedule.
No effect
Allows fixture to be placed on top of a cabinet. Symbols
remain selectable and independent of cabinet after placement. Can also be placed independently, 0" from floor to
bottom.
Electrical item is attached to ceiling at origin.
Uses switch default height.
Recognized by Plan Check as needing to be connected
to a switch.
Attaches fixture top to bottom of selected wall cabinet
and fixture back to adjacent wall. Fixture can be placed
independently on plan, and will locate itself 54" from floor
to bottom.
Electrical item is attached to floor at origin. Height Off
Floor can be used to specify distance from floor.
If an electrical symbol is given the GFCI attribute and is
placed behind a cabinet in a bathroom, Build> Electrical> Auto Place Outlets
recognizes it and will not
insert a GFCI outlet behind the cabinet.
Fixture will attach to wall at 54" from floor if placed within
8" of the nearest wall. Can be placed independently of
wall if placed more than 8" away and will insert at 54"
from floor to bottom.
869
Symbol
Wizard
Option
Option
Inserts
into
cabinet front
Fixtures
Inserts
into
countertop
Fixtures
Light
Electrical
Move
casing
out 1/2 inch, 1
inch at sill
Doorways
and Windows
No default door
in this doorway
Outdoor
Doorways
and Windows
Electrical
Outlet
Electrical
Phone
Electrical
Requires high/
standard voltage
Requires natural gas
Requires water
drain
Sits on floor
Fixtures
Smoke Detector
870
Categories
Effect on Symbol
Fixture will attach itself centrally to the front of a full
height cabinet. The fixture becomes merged with the cabinet, and is selectable and resizable only from the Cabinet Specification dialog. Cannot be placed independently.
When this is the single option selected, fixture can be
placed in a full height cabinet only.
*Note: CAD must also be the same size as the 3D's or
width/depth modification is required. For modification,
depth must equal distance from back of block to point
wanted to attach to cabinet, in order for 2D CAD to show
properly.
Fixture will rest on top of base cabinet, merging itself to it.
Cannot be placed independently. Fixture is not selectable.
Creates light source with available properties to individual symbols. Recognized by Plan Check as needing to
be connected to a switch.
This option only applies when a sill is present. Check this
box to have the casing moved out from the window or
doorway. The option System Supplies Rectangular Casing must also be checked.
Check this option to exclude a door from the doorway.
Fixtures
Fixtures
Fixtures and
Furniture
Electrical
Sizing
Categories
Switch
Electrical
Switched
Electrical
System
supplies rectangular casing
Thermostat
TV
Doorways
and Windows
Electrical
Electrical
Wall Mounted
Electrical
Effect on Symbol
Recognized by Plan Check for connection to a switched
item. Electrical Defaults determines placement above
floor.
Recognized by Plan Check as needing to be connected
to a switch.
Chief Architect will automatically supply rectangular casing if your model does not already have a casing.
No affect. Uses switch default height.
Presence is recognized by Plan Check. Uses outlet
default height.
Electrical item is attached to wall at origin.
Sizing
The Sizing window allows you to control the
size of a symbol and how it behaves when
resized. The objects Width (X), Depth (Y),
and Height (Z) are referenced to the nearest
1/16". The default size information for the
1
2
871
Symbol
Wizard
Option
872
Sizing
Stretch Zones
3 Stretch Zone - A Stretch Zone defines
873
Symbol
Wizard
Plant Information
This window appears for plant symbols.
When a plant search is conducted, this
information will be used to create a list of
2
3
4
874
Plant Attributes
Plant Attributes
Symbol
Wizard
1
2
3
4
875
Plant Description
876
Materials
Symbol
Wizard
Materials
DXF/DWG Files
All of the layers and layer names from the
original .dxf/.dwg file display on the left.
OBJ Files
One of the most useful features of the .obj
file format is its ability to record material
data that can be transferred from one
application to another.
Any material names associated with a face in
the .obj file will be listed on the left.
877
Openings
The Opening window of the Create
Symbol Wizard appears only for Windows
and Doorways.
When creating a doorway or window
symbol, Chief Architect needs information
878
879
Symbol
Wizard
Mulled Units
To represent a .dxf/.dwg that is a mulled
window or doorway you may need several
windows and possibly a door in floor plan
view.
Click the drop down list and select the
number of units. You can have up to 5
windows or 4 windows and a doorway. This
is independent of the opening.
880
Type Tab
Open Symbol
The Open Symbol
edit button
appears when a library object is
selected in floor plan view or 3D view. Click
it to open the Symbol Specification
dialog and edit the selected symbol.
A library symbol which has been placed in
floor plan view is a copy of the original,
which is stored in the Library Browser.
Changes made to a symbol using the Open
Symbol
edit button will only apply to the
selected copy.
3D Tab
The options in this dialog are the same as the
3D window in the Create Symbol
Wizard. See Loading the 3D File on page
862.
If you load a new .dxf/.dwg to an existing
symbol, all material information will be lost.
See Materials on page 877.
2D Block Tab
This dialog is similar to the 2D Block
window in the Create Symbol Wizard. It
allows you to select from the 2D blocks in
the list or generate a new one. See 2D
Block on page 866.
Options Tab
The options in this dialog are the same as the
Options window in the Create Symbol
Wizard. See Symbol Options on page
868.
881
Symbol
Wizard
Materials Tab
The options in this dialog are the same as the
Materials window in the Create Symbol
Wizard. See Materials on page 877.
Opening Tab
The Opening Tab will be present when the
Symbol Specification dialog is opened
882
Sizing Tab
The Sizing Tab is the same as the Sizing
Window of the Create Symbol Wizard.
See Sizing on page 871.
Chapter 38:
Chapter Overview
Chapter Contents
Introduction to Printing
Printers and Plotters
The Printing Tools
Displaying Objects
Line Weights
Printing Text and Dimensions
Printing to Scale
Printing Directly from a View
Printing from Layout
Printing Across Multiple Pages
Alternate Printing Methods
Creating Custom Sheet Sizes
Troubleshooting Printing Problems
Page Setup Dialog
Print Dialog
Print Image Dialog
Printing
883
Introduction to Printing
Always familiarize yourself with your
printer or plotter before a deadline. It
may take a little time to configure the
machine properly when you first start.
Output Options
Printing From Layout - For professional
quality drawings and details in full size
format, printing from layout provides the
most control and the best results. For more
information, see Layout Files on page 903.
Printing Directly From a View - For
individual drawings or details, you may
prefer to print directly from a view. The
process is quick and allows full control over
scaling, positioning, line weights, etc. See
Printing Directly from a View on page
893.
Printing to a Remote Plotter/Printer Plans can be saved electronically and printed
remotely. Available file formats are .prn/.plt
or .pdf. See To print to a remote printer/
plotter: on page 895.
Export the plan and print from another
program - Plans can be exported in either
.dxf or .dwg file formats; imported into
another CAD program that supports these
file types; and printed. See Exporting 2D
DXF/DWG Files on page 852.
884
Terminology
There are a few terms that you should
familiarize yourself with.
Sheet Size - The dimensions of the final
printed output. This may or may not be the
same as the paper size. If the sheet size and
paper size are the same, only one page will
be required per sheet. See Page Setup
Dialog on page 898.
Paper Size - The dimensions of the paper to
be printed upon. Specifying a paper size that
is smaller than the sheet size allows large
drawings to be printed across multiple pages.
The preview in the Page Setup dialog
clearly illustrates the difference between
page size and sheet size. For more, see Page
Setup Dialog on page 898.
When a "printed
paper" size of 8
x 11 is selected,
15 pages will be
required to fill an
Architectural D
"drawing sheet"
size (24" x 36").
Print Drivers
Print driver programs are interpreters
between software programs and the printer.
The drivers are usually created by the
manufacturer of the printer and are typically
updated regularly. Different drivers are used
for different versions of Windows. It is
useful to keep track of the drivers for each
printer or plotter, making sure to update them
885
Printing
886
Toggle Buttons
Toggle buttons are either on or off. When on
they appear depressed and will remain
depressed until clicked again. See Toggle
Buttons on page 64.
Show Line Weights - When this is on,
line weights appear on screen as they
will appear on printed paper. See Show
Line Weights on page 887.
Show Sheet - Turn this toggle on for a
preview of your plan relative to the
current sheet size. See Show Sheet on page
887.
Print Preview - Turn this toggle on for
a preview of how your plan will appear
when printed. See Print Preview on page
887.
Displaying Objects
To control the display of objects when
printing directly from a view, click the
Display Options
button and turn layers
on/off in the appropriate column of the
Layer Display Options dialog. See
Layer Display Options Dialog on page
119.
To control the display of objects in a plan
view sent to layout, select the view; click the
Layout Box Layers
edit button; and edit
layers to control the display of objects in the
selected view in layout.
To control the display of objects in a camera
view sent to layout, you must turn on/off the
desired layers in the view before it is sent to
layout.
Creating a special layer set for printing may
be useful if you are not printing from layout.
Print Preview
Objects that appear in some views but
do not appear when printed, such as
camera objects and CAD points, will not
appear in a print preview. Text and
dimension objects appear on-screen as they
will on the printed page.
When Print Preview
buttons Show Sheet
Weights
are overridden.
Show Sheet
Click the Show Sheet button to display
the drawing sheet on screen. The
887
Printing
Setup dialog.
on page 898.
When selected at its border the sheet displays edit handles, allowing it to be
resized, relocated, and rotated. See Editing Selected Objects on page 10.
Center Sheet
Click the Center Sheet button to
center the drawing sheet on the
drawing. This moves the sheet relative to the
drawing but does not affect the position of
the drawing. The location of the drawing
sheet is independent for each floor of the
model.
Line Weights
The weight of a line is measured in absolute
terms as a fraction of a unit, such as 1/600th
of an inch or 1/25th of a millimeter. Line
weights are assigned to objects using whole
numbers which correspond to the numerator
of this fraction.
The required method for changing the Line
Weight for a particular object depends on the
object and the type of view.
888
Line Weights
The line weight applied to Vector Overviews can be set in the Print dialog. See
Print Dialog on page 899.
is depressed.
inch = 1 ft
inch = 2 ft
inch = 4 ft
To see this for yourself on screen (without printing), click the Show Line
Weights edit button. For more information,
see Toggle Buttons on page 886.
inch = 8 ft
What this graphic does not illustrate is the
amount of space the CAD line occupies on
the printed page at each scale. To see this,
889
Printing
toggle buttons.
inch = 1 ft
inch = 2 ft
inch = 4 ft
inch = 8 ft
Notice that the same CAD line does not
become thicker or thinner on the printed page
as the drawing scale changes. The line
weight is maintained in relation to the
drawing scale, becoming thicker or thinner
as necessary to preserve its assigned weight
on the printed page. A given line weight will
appear on the printed page with the same
thickness, regardless of the specified
drawing scale.
890
Legacy Plans
When plans created in prior versions of Chief
Architect are opened in Version 10, they will
assume the settings specified on the Text and
Page Setup panel of the Preferences
dialog. For more information, see Text and
Page Setup Panel on page 99.
print is to Zoom In
Imperial Plans
1/8" = 1
" = 1'
3/8" = 1'
" = 1'
" = 1'
on them.
Plan Scale
in Layout
Necessary
Desired
Character
Print Height
Height
1"
"
3/8"
"
1/8"
1"
"
3/8"
"
1/8"
1"
"
3/8"
"
1/8"
96
48
36
24
12
48
24
18
12
6
36
18
12
8
4
1"
"
3/8"
"
1/8"
1"
"
3/8"
"
1/8"
24
12
9
6
3
16
8
6
4
2
891
Printing
Text may not print exactly as it appears onscreen. To get a better idea of how letters,
numbers and other characters in text will
1:50m
1:75m
1:100m
1:200m
Metric Plans
The following table is a metric equivalent of
the imperial dimensioning system.
Plan Scale
in Layout
Desired Print
Height
Necessary
Character
Height
1:25m
25 mm
20 mm
15 mm
10 mm
5 mm
62.5
50
37.5
25
12.5
25 mm
20 mm
15 mm
10 mm
5 mm
25 mm
20 mm
15 mm
10 mm
5 mm
25 mm
20 mm
15 mm
10 mm
5 mm
25 mm
20 mm
15 mm
10 mm
5 mm
125
100
73
50
25
187.5
150
112.5
75
37.5
250
200
150
100
50
500
400
300
200
100
Printing to Scale
Several different print scaling options are
available. The type of view that you are
printing will determine which options you
may choose from.
Orthogonal Views
Floor plan views, cross section/elevation
views, and CAD details are considered
"orthogonal". Orthogonal views can be
printed to scale through the Print dialog.
892
3D Views
Vector and render views are referred to as 3D
views; can only be printed through the Print
Image dialog; and cannot be accurately
scaled. See Print Image Dialog on page
902.
Check Plots
Check plots can be made from the Print
dialog. Check plots temporarily adjust
everything in a plan to the specified fraction.
Drawing scale and line weights are subject to
the scale adjustment for check plots. See
Print Dialog on page 899.
893
Printing
Fill Window
button to display the plan
in relation to the drawing sheet. Lines
indicate where the page breaks will occur.
The blue border which represents the
printable area of your printer may not appear
on all sides. See Show Sheet on page 887.
894
2.
3.
4.
5.
Printing to File
Before using this printing method, you
should try creating a .pdf file. See Printing
to a PDF File on page 894.
If you do not own a plotter, you can print to a
file; send the file to a service bureau via
email or disk; and have prints made. Either
the .prn or the .plt file extension can be
used. Unlike .pdf files, .prn and .plt files
cannot easily be viewed.
To print to file:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Test to make sure that everything is configured properly and functioning. Create
print files of a simple plan and send
them to the service bureau for printing.
2.
3.
895
Printing
1.
6.
4.
7.
5.
Exporting to DXF/DWG
896
Select a sheet size and click Copy to create a duplicate sheet size.
Help Database
For answers to frequently asked questions
regarding printing and other topics, visit the
Technical Support section of our Web site at
www.chiefarchitect.com.
897
Printing
3
4
5
6
1 Select the printer paper Size and
898
Print Dialog
Print Dialog
Direct printing can be used with any printer
and any sized paper. To print directly from
any floor plan view or cross section/elevation
view, choose File> Print> Print
Print dialog opens.
command.
. The
899
Printing
2
5
3
4
900
Print Dialog
901
Printing
902
Chapter 39:
Layout Files
Chapter Overview
Chapter Contents
Layout
Files
903
Layout Buttons
Click the Send to Layout button to
open the Send to Layout dialog and
send the current view to the specified layout
page. See Sending Views to Layout on
page 908.
Use the Page Up, Page Down, and
Change Layout Page buttons to
navigate the layout document. See The
Current Page on page 905.
Click the Edit Layout button to allow
the lines of a vector view sent to layout
to be edited individually. See Editing
Layout Lines on page 916.
Click Swap Views to switch between
the current view and the view that was
current before it. See Swapping Views on
page 620.
Edit Buttons
Select a layout view and click the
Open View edit button to open the
view that was originally sent to layout. See
Opening Dynamic Views on page 914.
Select a layout view and click the
Rescale Layout edit button to open the
Change Scale dialog and apply a different
scale. See Rescaling Views on page 915.
Select a layout view and click the
Relink File edit button to open the
Choose Layout File Reference dialog
and relink the selected layout view. See
Relinking Layout Views on page 920.
Select a layout view and click the
Layout Box Layers edit button to
open the Layer Display Options dialog
for the selected view only. See Displaying
Layout Views on page 915.
904
Printer Setup
You can install print drivers on your
computer for any printer. The new driver can
then be specified as your printer even if the
printer has never been physically attached to
your computer. To print to a printer that is
not connected to your computer, you will
Printing Services
If you are going to use a printing service, be
sure to install the driver for the printer in the
Printers folder of the Control Panel. Find out
what paper size the printer company uses and
select this printer and paper size in the Page
Check Plots
If a large size printer has been chosen for the
layout, it is still possible to run a check plot
on a smaller printer. This allows you to make
final checks before printing to the larger
sizes. See Check Plots on page 893.
905
Layout
Files
2.
Creating Borders
Once the print area of the layout sheet is
established, you can use CAD tools to create
borders for your layout pages on sheet zero.
For information about the printable area, see
Show Sheet on page 887.
Drawing borders may be simplified by
making a few changes in the Preferences
dialog. To access the dialog, select Edit>
Preferences from the menu, or click the
Preferences
button. When you have
finished creating borders you will probably
want to reverse these changes.
906
4.
child but-
4.
5.
6.
Thicker borders can be created by defining the color, style, and/or line weight
for the CAD objects.
7.
2.
3.
Title Block
Create the title block using CAD boxes, lines
and text on layout page zero. Include only
those items which should display on every
layout page. You can create areas for pagespecific information, which can be filled in
later on each page.
A company logo can be added to a layout by
importing it as a bitmap into a CAD detail;
then sending the CAD detail to the layout.
You can also embed the image in the layout
file.
Text Macros
Page numbers can be entered on page zero
using text macros that are available with the
Text tool. The correct page number will
appear on all pages. A variety of other macros are also available including date/time,
file name, drawing scale, and others. See
Text Macros on page 709.
907
Layout
Files
e
c
a
pl
e
R
Object
edit button. The specification
dialog for the selected object(s) opens.
CAD objects can be edited in layout just
as they are edited in floor plan view. See
CAD Objects on page 725.
To edit text objects, select them individually or as a group and click the Open
edit button. The Text
Specification dialog opens. Text
Object
To edit CAD objects, select them individually or as a group and click the Open
Images in Layout
Images can be imported into a layout file just
as they are imported into floor plan view. See
Importing Picture Files on page 826.
908
2.
3.
5.
6.
7.
4.
3
4
5
button
909
6
7
910
were clicked.
vent the merging of colinear lines. Horizontal and vertical lines will still merge.
If Suppress Line Merge is not selected and
a cross section/elevation view is sent to
layout, the program will merge any lines
which are superimposed or parallel with each
911
Layout
Files
Dynamic Views
A dynamic view is one that references the
view saved with the original plan. Any
changes made to the original plan will update
the dynamic layout view.
For information about controlling the display
of dynamic views in layout, see Displaying
Layout Views on page 915.
When a view is sent to layout, the layout view is linked to the .plan file. Once
linked, do not change the path name by moving the .plan file to a new folder or renaming
it. If the path name is changed, the link within
the layout file will need to be reestablished for
the view to appear in layout. The best way to
do this is to use the Relink File tool or to
resend the drawing to layout. See Relinking
Layout Views on page 920.
Static Views
A static view does not reference the original
plan and will not be updated when the plan
changes. Changes made in the original plan
must then resent to layout manually.
Layer display attributes can be set independently without affecting the original
plan or detail. See Displaying Layout
Views on page 915.
Cross Sections/Elevations
Views created using the Cross Section/
Elevation
, and
912
, Wall Elevation
CAD objects added in a cross section/elevation view can only be edited in the
cross section/elevation view.
Objects
mode will activate the original view, allowing modifications to the
model or added CAD objects.
Floor Overview
The lines that define cross section/elevation views in layout are automatically
generated copies that are no longer linked
to the 3D model. Once in layout, these
lines can be edited using the Edit Layout
button. See Editing Layout Lines on
page 917.
Updating Cross
Sections/Elevations
If a cross section/elevation view has been
sent to layout,and that camera is activated
while the layout sheet is open, closing the
view will open the following dialog:
, Vector
tools
The lines that define these views are generated automatically. When vector views
are sent to layout, a line-for-line copy of
the view is sent to layout. The view is no
longer associated with the 3D model.
913
Layout
Files
Vector Views
Moving Views to
a Different Page
Deleting Views
Del
Copying Views
You cannot copy a view by selecting the
view border in layout and copying it.
If multiple copies of one view are needed,
send the view to layout as many times as
necessary. Each view will behave
independently.
914
key.
Rescaling Views
Rescaling Views
Floor plan views, section/elevations,
wall elevations and CAD details can
be rescaled on the layout page. To
change the scale of the image, select the
border, and click the Rescale Layout View
edit button or select Tools> Layout>
Rescale Layout View. The Change Scale
dialog opens.
2.
915
Layout
Files
1
2
1.
1.
Select Objects
original view.
2.
2.
to open the
toggle button.
A table has been prepared to help you determine what size your text and dimensions
should be set for printing purposes. See,
Printing Text and Dimensions on page 891.
916
Layout
Files
1
2
3
5
7
4
6
917
918
Use Export> Export Entire Plan to create an independent copy of the original
layout. Avoid use of "Save As".
2.
3.
919
Layout
Files
2.
3.
2.
Any elevations or cross sections associated with the missing file(s) display the
automatically generated lines, but any
added CAD objects will be absent.
920
1
3
2
Scaling
The only noteable difference in the Print
dialog when accessed from a .layout file is
the scale that displays.
921
Layout
Files
General Tab
On the General tab you can specify the exact
size and location of the layout box. See
General Tab on page 747.
Layout Defaults
To access the layout defaults for the
current layout file, select Edit>
Default Settings; select Layout from the
Default Settings dialog; and click Edit....
The settings in the Layout Defaults dialog
are comparable to those in the Plan
Defaults dialog. Some options that do not
922
Chapter 40:
Model Maker
Chapter Overview
Chapter Contents
Model
Maker
923
3
5
7
2
4
6
8
9
1 Printer - Select the printer for your
10
11
12
13
14
924
925
Model
Maker
Walls
Walls should be cut and fixed to a rigid
backing so that they can stand on their own
and/or support the weight of the roof or
floors above them. How they are cut and
assembled will vary depending on the
desired appearance of the Model and how
they were printed. It may be helpful to take
the thickness of the rigid material being used
into consideration and override the scale
thickness of the walls so that it agrees with
your material thickness.
If your walls were resized in the Print
Model dialog you may see unwanted lines
926
Roofs
Roof planes are joined together when
possible before printing. For each roof
surface, the fascia and soffit surfaces are
attached at the eave, so that the least amount
of taping will produce the roof and adjoining
surfaces.
All flattened roof/fascia/soffit surfaces are
placed into a CAD detail named "Model
Detail". This is overwritten and updated each
time the roof group is printed for a particular
model. If the roof or portions of the roof need
to be reprinted, those pieces can be printed
from the detail.
Chapter 41:
Schedules
Chapter Overview
A schedule is essentially a large, tabbed, text
object with grid lines separating rows and
columns. Schedules are available for Doors,
Windows, Fixture, Furniture, and Electrical
items. A schedule can contain information
for one or all floors of your plan.
Chapter Contents
Schedule Defaults
Creating Schedules
Schedule Specification Dialog
Converting Schedules to Text
A Window Schedule Example
Schedule Defaults
Schedule defaults can also be accessed by
Schedules
927
Creating Schedules
Schedules can be created in floor plan view
and in CAD detail windows.
In Layout
Schedules can be placed in plans or CAD
details. If you want a schedule to only appear
in a layout, create the schedule in an empty
CAD detail window and send it to layout.
928
tool.
Text Tab
5
6
2
4
Schedules
929
930
Components dialog.
is
For Doors
Single Doors - Include single doors.
Double Doors - Include double doors.
931
Schedules
For Fixtures
Plumbing - Include any fixtures with the
Appears in plumbing schedule option
checked in the Symbol Specification
dialog.
Appliances - Include any fixtures with the
Appears in appliance schedule option
checked in the Symbol Specification
dialog.
HVAC - Include any fixtures with the
Appears in HVAC schedule option checked
in the Symbol Specification dialog.
Indoor - Include any fixtures in the Fixtures
(Interior) library category that dont appear
in Plumbing, Appliances, or HVAC.
Outdoor - Include any fixtures in the
Fixtures (Exterior) library category that
dont appear in Plumbing, Appliances, or
HVAC.
932
Attributes Tab
1
2
3
4
Label Tab
The Label tab of the Schedule
Specification dialog sets the type, size and
933
Schedules
2
3
934
Schedules
935
936
click in the SubCat column; choose a subcategory from the drop-down list; and rename the
Item from "accessory" to the actual material
information.
If you need a new subcategory, click Edit Sub
Categories, then use the subcategory when
you return to the Components dialog.
The window schedule will update to reflect
the new materials as soon as you click OK.
These materials will also be placed into any
material lists that you generate.
Materials Lists
Chapter Overview
Chief Architect can calculate a Materials List
in three ways: From All Floors, From Area,
or From Room. In addition, a polyline or
multiple polylines can be used to define areas
in a plan from which a materials list can be
generated.
Materials lists can then be created, edited,
and printed directly from the program. They
can also be exported as text, html or
Microsoft Excel format files for use in other
programs.
The Materials List is based on certain
assumptions which may not match your
building style. Chief Architect makes no representation as to the accuracy or reliability of
the Materials List generated by Chief Architect. Always compare the Materials List with a
manual take-off before providing a quote or
ordering material for a job.
Chapter Contents
937
Materials
Lists
Chapter 42:
938
939
Materials
Lists
From Room
. This button can also be
selected from either the room edit toolbar or
the Materials List child buttons. A materials
list is created for only the contents of that
room: wall materials will not be included.
940
Materials Polyline
To create a materials polyline, select
Tools> Materials List> Materials
Polyline. Draw a rectangular polyline
in floor plan view around the area to be
calculated. Select the polyline and click the
Categories
To do this:
1.
2.
941
Materials
Lists
Materials Polyline
942
Materials
Lists
943
Del
Editing Columns
The columns in a materials list, the
Components dialog and the Master List
are all very similar. Some columns dont
appear in all places, however. Refer to the
following for a description of the capabilities
of each column.
For columns that can be edited by typing in
text; double click to cell to begin editing.
ID - This column displays an automatically
generated identifier for each entry. If you
click on this column in the components
dialog or in the materials list dialog you can
change the category of an item.
Use - This column appears only in the Master
List and Components dialog. It is a check
box that indicates whether the item will be
displayed in a generated materials list. If this
is unchecked in either place the item will not
show up in the materials list. This is very
useful in cases where Chief will generate
several items but you really only want 1 item
to be displayed because it will be purchased
as a single unit.
Sub Cat. - This column allows you to choose
the sub category. Sub categories are defined
on the Materials> Categories panel of the
Preferences dialog. You can also type in
the sub category directly by double clicking
on the cell.
944
945
Materials
Lists
Editing Columns
Copying
Sections of the Materials List can be copied
and then pasted into a text box or into a word
processing program or spreadsheet program
using the standard Windows Copy, Cut and
Paste commands.
You can also copy and paste items that can
normally be edited by selecting a block of
cells.
946
Controlling Object
Display by Layer
The inclusion of objects in the materials list
can be controlled by selecting Tools>
Display Options
Options Dialog.
Material List
Display Options Dialog
When a materials list is open, click the
Display Options
button or select
Tools> Display Options from the Materials
List menu to open the Material List
Display Options dialog for the materials
or the Master List. These options correspond
with the options in the Master List panel of
the Preferences dialog. See Master List
Panel on page 112.
Subcategories
The materials list and Master List come with
predefined categories. For each of these
categories you can define any number of
subcategories. Subcategories are defined in
the Categories panel in the Preferences
dialog. See Categories Panel on page 113.
Subcategories can be specified for any item
in the Materials List or Components
dialog. Once a subcategory is defined, it can
be selected from the drop down list in the
Type column.
A subcategory consists of a code and a
description. The code can be any sequence of
characters, up to 12 characters in length. The
description is how you want to label, or
describe the sub-category. For example:
LKS Lockset
Subcategories are used when creating door
and window schedules. When creating a
schedule, you could, for example choose to
see the lockset for all doors and windows in
947
Materials
Lists
Options Tab
Columns Tab
1
2
1 Check Restrict floor and select the
948
Materials
Lists
Accessories
1.
2.
3.
4.
You can also edit all of the other columns for accessory items, except for the
ID field.
949
5.
edit button.
child tool.
Manufacturers
Select Tools> Material Lists>
Manufacturers to open the
Manufacturers dialog.
950
1
3
2
4
5
7
Materials
Lists
Estimating Software
You can export the Materials List to a word
processor or spreadsheet program to arrange
it in your estimating format. You can also
export the Materials List to a number of
commercial estimating programs in whose
database you would keep your current
pricing, labor costs, markups, etc. and be
able to generate many different reports based
on this data.
If you are purchasing an estimating software
program, make sure in advance that the
program supports the direct import of the
Chief Architect Materials List.
Any questions regarding estimating software
packages and how they interact with Chief
Architect should be directed toward the
company providing the estimating software.
Chief Architect is unable to provide any
technical support for third party programs.
951
952
Appendix A
Tech
Support
Technical Support
Services
Chief Architect is committed to providing
world-class technical support and training to
complement our professional products. Our
support professionals are eager to work with
you to make certain your program is
functioning as designed.
Although the primary function of technical
support is to make sure your program is
functioning correctly and to help you quickly
resolve problems that prevent its normal use,
our Technical Support staff is trained in the
Help Database
The Chief Architect Technical Support Help
Database at www.chiefarchitect.com contains a variety of articles describing how to
resolve common technical problems and
achieve specific design goals. The Help
Database can be referred to again and again
at your convenience.
Video Training
Chief Architect offers a video CD training
series and toolkits that contain in-depth
training on a wide range of topics from
beginning to advanced experience levels. For
more information about these products, visit
our Web site: www.chiefarchitect.com.
Interactive Training
If you have questions about how to use Chief
Architect, consider contacting our training
department for a personal tutoring session.
953
Seminars
Throughout the year, Chief Architect
conducts training seminars in various
locations around the United States and
User Forum
Our ChiefTalk User Forum is a great place to
discuss and exchange ideas with other Chief
Architect users. Here you can post questions;
read discussions from other users; and post
suggestions to improve our product. In
addition to our regular users, you will find
that from time to time, our engineering and
support teams monitor the forum and provide
input and discussion on current topics. This
resource is available without charge at
www.chiefarchitect.com/chieftalk.
954
Installation Issues
The following are common reasons for
installation failure of Chief Architect and
other software:
1.
Anti-virus software is enabled and interfering with installation. Anti-virus software is the number one cause of
installation failures for any type of software. Refer to the documentation for
2.
1.
3.
2.
3.
4.
Printing Problems
Printing problems fall into two main
categories: problems that prevent the printer
from working in any program; and problems
printing from Chief Architect. To determine
955
Tech
Support
Error Messages
It is important that abnormal errors be
reported to Chief Architect Technical
Support so that we can identify and resolve
any problems. Windows XP error reports do
not get sent to us: the only way we can find
out about an error message that you
encounter is if you report it to us by e-mail or
telephone.
The content of an error message is useful in
diagnosing its cause. If you get an error
956
Web Support
Chief Architect has a variety of support
resources available on our Web site. These
include our Technical Support Help
Database; the How do I? Solution
Finder; downloadable program updates; and
ways to contact our Technical Support
department. To access these resources, visit:
www.chiefarchitect.com.
Our support team is happy to assist you in
finding the best resource to answer your
questions, and can resolve most issues in just
a few minutes. In order to allow us to quickly
answer your calls, we ask that you limit
yourself to one question per support call.
E-mail Support
Questions can be e-mailed to the Technical
Support department. To send an e-mail, visit
the Technical Support section of our Web site
and use the e-mail submission form. This
route ensures that your e-mail will be
delivered to the first available support
professional. E-mailing an individual
specialist directly is not always a good idea,
957
Tech
Support
Submitting Plans
If Chief Architect asks for a plan file to be
submitted via e-mail, your plan will be used
internally to answer your question and will
not be released to anyone outside of our
office.
In some cases, you may need to submit a
plan to Technical Support for evaluation. If
you are asked to submit a plan, follow these
steps.
958
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Telephone Support
Our support team is committed to answering
your questions as quickly as possible. There
are times when we get more calls than
expected and you may have to wait a few
minutes before speaking to a technician.
Your call is important to us and will be
answered as quickly as possible in the order
in which it was received.
Appendix B
Whats New
in 10.0
Whats New in
Version 10.0
Before opening any plans created in earlier versions of Chief Architect, it is important to be
aware of some significant changes and the affect they may have on your plans. There are many
new features in Chief Architect Version 10 and there are many existing features that have
changed. Some of these changes will affect the way you use Chief Architect so it is very
important to review them carefully. We have provided the following checklist of what you
should do as an upgrade customer to help migrate your plans to Chief Architect Version 10.
More information about each of these steps can be found after the following checklist.
959
2.
3.
4.
Setup your legacy plan conversion preferences before opening any plan files.
a. Set your legacy text and dimension conversion fonts.
b. Set your legacy plan and layout page setup information.
c. Set your legacy layer conversion settings.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Review the new features list and familiarize yourself with the changes.
a. Text and arrows attached to text.
b. Layers and the Layer Display Options dialog.
c. File Management.
d. Materials are now stored in the library.
e. CAD and Grid Snaps.
f. Printing and Page Setup.
g. 3D Layer Control.
h. Transform/Replicate dialog.
i. Roof Planes are moved up and down using the Transform/Replicate dialog.
j. Show Layout button is not in default toolbar configuration.
9.
1. Check for any available program updates - Program updates often contain many
improvements over the original release version and we highly recommend using the most
current version available. By the time you have received and installed your copy of Chief
Architect Version 10, a program update will probably already be available. The first time you
run Chief Architect, the program will automatically check for any program updates. At any
time after this, you can manually check for updates by selecting the menu option Help>
Download Program Updates. You can also check for program updates by going directly to the
960
2. Migrate your custom and/or third party library files - The Chief Architect installer
should find any custom library files from previous versions and ask you if you want to copy
them into your Version 10 Libraries folder. If you install Version 10 on a different machine than
your previous version, the installer will not be able to find your custom library files. If the
installer does not ask you to copy your old library files or if you decide that you only want to
bring some of them forward into Version 10, you can always migrate them forward manually.
To manually migrate any library files to Version 10, you only need to copy the library files
(these will usually have the .alb file extension) from your previous Libraries folder into your
Version 10 Libraries folder using Windows Explorer. You should avoid copying any of the
library files that were installed with your previous version of Chief Architect because these
files have all been updated for Version 10 and the new ones should include everything that was
previously available. You might notice that the library files that get installed with Chief
Architect Version 10 will no longer be installed in the Libraries folder. These files will be
installed in a new folder called Core Libraries and you should not install or copy any of your
custom libraries into the Core Libraries folder. More information about transferring third party
library files can be found at, Third Party Libraries on page 564.
3. Migrate your custom graphics files - If you had any custom graphics files, including
textures, images or backdrops, that you were using in a previous version of Chief Architect,
you will need to manually copy them using Windows Explorer to use them in Version 10. Copy
any custom texture files from your previous Textures folder to your Version 10 Textures folder.
Copy any custom image files from your previous Images folder to your Version 10 Images
folder. Copy any custom backdrop files from your previous Backdrops folder to your Version
10 Backdrops folder. We recommend that you keep all of your custom graphics files in a
subfolder that has a unique name to keep them separate from the graphics files that are installed
with Chief Architect. We have provided folders specifically for this purpose, called My
Textures, My Images, and My Backdrops. You may note that your texture and image files will
not automatically show up in the Library Browser in Version 10. Material and image objects
are now stored in the library instead of just storing the graphics files. There are several new
tools available for creating material and image objects in your library either one at a time or as
a whole group. For information about converting images, see Creating Images on page 831.
For information about converting textures and materials, see Creating Materials on page 598.
4. Setup your legacy plan conversion preferences before opening any plan files - We
have provided several different preference settings that will help you control how your legacy
plans are migrated into Chief Architect Version 10. You may want to do some experiments with
these settings so that you fully understand how they affect your older plans when they are read
into Version 10.
a. Set your legacy text and dimension conversion fonts - Default text and dimension
fonts can now be set up on an individual plan basis. You should set your Legacy Text
961
Whats New
in 10.0
Chief Architect Web site at www.chiefarchitect.com and navigating to the program updates
page. Note that you will only be able to download an update if you have internet access.
Conversion font and your Legacy Dimension Conversion fonts in your preferences
before opening any old plans. Use the same settings here that you had in your preferences for your previous version of Chief Architect so that your text and dimensions
will look the same. For more information, see Font Panel on page 97.
b. Set your legacy plan and layout page setup information - Page Setup information
can now be setup on an individual plan basis. Use the Page Setup preference for legacy plans and layouts so that your plans and layouts are setup the same way they were
in your previous version. Note: You should make sure you leave the scale for layouts
at 1 to 1. For more information, see Text and Page Setup Panel on page 99.
c. Set your legacy layer conversion settings - Significant changes have been made to
improve the setup and control of layers in Version 10. Preference settings have been
provided to allow you to control how your legacy plan layers are converted when you
open a previous version plan in Version 10. By default, layers should be converted
into the new format so that they will more closely match the defaults that we have provided in the template plans. You can modify these settings so that your layers will
more closely match how they looked in your previous version. For more information,
see Layers Panel on page 104.
5. Review the rest of the program preferences - Any changes that you made to preference
settings in your previous version will not be migrated into Chief Architect Version 10. You
should review all of the program preference settings to make sure any settings that differ from
the system defaults are modified appropriately. If you ever need to reinstall Chief Architect you
should review the preference settings again. For more information, see Preferences Dialog on
page 94.
6. Migrate your custom template plan and layout files - By default, Chief Architect
Version 10 will install a template plan that will be used for new plans. You may want to
continue using any custom template files that you used in your previous version. To do so, you
can manually migrate these files by copying them using Windows Explorer from your previous
Templates folder to your Version 10 templates folder. You should then open the template files
you have migrated by selecting File> Open Plan and review all of the default settings, making
changes where appropriate. You may also want to review all of the settings in the default
template plan, profile.plan, to make sure the settings are how you want them. For more
information, see Template Plans on page 79.
7. Setup your custom toolbar configurations - It is possible, but not recommended, to
migrate toolbar configuration files from previous versions to Chief Architect Version 10.
Instead, we recommend that select Tools> Customize Toolbars in Version 10 and setup your
custom toolbars the way you would like them.
8. Review the new features list and familiarize yourself with the changes - Some of the
new features allow you to produce plans much more efficiently so it is to your advantage to get
to know all of the new features. Some of the existing features have been enhanced significantly
962
and you will need to know how they work to take advantage of them. The following list are
some of the features that have changed significantly that we feel are the most important for you
to know about. You should review these areas before starting a new project or bringing any
existing projects into Version 10.
a. Text and arrows attached to text - The text tools have changed significantly in Chief
Architect Version 10. For more information, see Text on page 703. Arrowheads
attached to text objects also behave very differently in Version 10. For more information, see Text Arrows on page 705.
b. Layers and the Layer Display Options dialog - You now have the ability to create
as many layers using any naming convention you like in Chief Architect Version 10.
You also have the ability to assign any object to any layer without being restricted by
the type of layer. For more information, see Layer Display Options Dialog on page
119.
c. File Management - Chief Architect now stores all of your plan information in a single file with a .plan extension instead of storing each floor in a separate file (.pl1,
.pl2, etc.). We have also changed the way backup and archive versions of plan files
behave. For more information, see File Management on page 71.
d. Materials are now stored in the library - Instead of seeing a list of available texture
files in the Library Browser, you will now see a complete list of materials objects.
This means that you no longer need to maintain a lengthy list of materials in your template plans and you can access them directly from the library when you need them.
Chief Architect will still maintain a copy of the material in a plan when it is used, so
for the most part you can continue to use materials as you did in previous versions.
There are also several new tools available for migrating materials into your Version 10
libraries. For more information, see Creating Materials on page 598.
e. CAD and Grid Snaps - Visual CAD snaps are now available in Chief Architect Version 10. These tools work very differently than the CAD snaps of previous versions.
There are many customizable settings and tools available for you to control how these
tools behave. There is also a snap grid and a reference grid available that you have full
control over. The old Unrestricted Angle tool is now called Angle Snaps. For more
information, see Object Snapping on page 783, Angle Snapping on page 784, and
Grid Snapping on page 785.
f. Printing and Page Setup - Chief Architect Version 10 has the ability to setup your
page information on an individual plan or layout basis. This will allow you to design
your plan or layout around the specific paper size that you intend to print to. For more
information, see Page Setup Dialog on page 898. Version 10 also has much better
control over text and line scaling so that you can use the Print Preview mode to see
exactly what will get printed out. For more information, see Display Options and
Printing on page 887.
g. 3D Layer Control - The functionality of the Include tab of the 3D Preferences dialog
has been replaced by the 3D column in the Layer Display Options dialog. You can
963
Whats New
in 10.0
now control the display of all objects in 3D views in the Layer Display Options dialog. For more information, see Displaying Objects on page 125.
h. Transform/Replicate dialog - The Move Object, Rotate Object, Resize Object,
Reflect Object dialogs have been replaced with the Transform/Replicate dialog. For
more information, see Transform/Replicate Object on page 793.
i. Roof Planes are moved up and down using the Transform/Replicate dialog. Roof
planes are no longer moved up and down using the Roof Plane Specification dialog.
Other objects can be moved up/down using this dialog as well. For more information,
see Raising/Lowering Roof Planes on page 307.
j. Show Layout button is not in default toolbar configuration - The Show Layout
button is available through the customize toolbars feature. For more information, see
Layout Buttons on page 904.
9. Review the Chief Architect Tutorial Videos - The tutorial videos included with Chief
Architect Version 10 will give you a nice overview of the features available. It is also
recommended that you obtain the Chief Architect 10.0 CD Video Training Series. These
resources can be very helpful even for upgrade users because many of the new features are
covered. They may also show you some great new ways to use the features that you are already
familiar with.
10. Check www.chiefarchitect.com for more information - If you have additional questions
about the changes in Version 10, we have more up to date information on our web site in the
support area. You can also post questions on the ChiefTalk web forum.
Menu items display their respective toolbar button for quick association and ease
of use. See Toolbars and Menus on
page 21.
Menus and
Toolbar Buttons
964
New dormer defaults specify initial settings for automatically created dormers.
See Dormer Defaults on page 334.
Frequency of Undo saves can be specified based on idle time. See General
Panel on page 100.
Layers have been renamed and reorganized for easy access, management, and
compatibility with other CAD programs.
See Layer Display Options Dialog on
page 119.
Layers
965
Whats New
in 10.0
File Management
Wall coverings can be specified for individual walls. See Wall Covering Tab on
page 178.
966
Rooms
Doors
Doorway
tool allows you to place
doorways without doors directly into a
wall. See Doorways on page 210.
door edit
Floors
Second roof pitch beginning can be specified by height or offset from baseline.
See Roof Tab on page 170.
Stairs
The first floor can be deleted. See Deleting Floors on page 270.
Plan files can be opened more than once
to display multiple floor plan views at the
same time. See The Current Floor on
page 270.
Electrical
Roofs
967
Whats New
in 10.0
Cabinets
Corner cabinets and other special cabinets can be created directly in the
Cabinet Specification dialog. See
General Tab on page 475.
Sinks can now be placed in corner cabinets and can span across cabinets. See
Editing Cabinets on page 467.
968
Lazy susans can be placed in corner cabinets. See Front Tab on page 478.
Terrain
New Terrain toolbar configuration centralizes terrain tools. See Terrain Configuration Button on page 490.
Architectural Blocks
More objects can be included in architectural blocks, including custom countertops; slabs; image, electrical, and terrain
objects; molding polylines; and polyline
solids. See Creating Architectural
Blocks on page 556.
Architectural blocks can display as a single object in floor plan view, schedules,
and materials lists. See General Tab on
page 561.
Libraries
Terrain contour label font can be specified. See Contours Tab on page 514
969
Whats New
in 10.0
The Create Plan Materials Library feature allows users of prior versions to convert material template plans to libraries in
the 10.0 format.
Materials based on textures can be created and added to the Library Browser.
See Converting Textures to Materials
on page 598.
Materials
970
The starting points of textures and patterns can be specified, allowing textures
that are assigned to materials attached to
objects to be mapped. See Mapping Patterns and Textures on page 599.
, Next Window
Render Views
Vector Views
971
Whats New
in 10.0
ment and dimensioning; and grid snapping. See Editing Text on page 707.
Raytracing
Dimensions
Text
Text can be sized and scaled with precision in the Text Specification dialog.
See Sizing Text on page 708.
972
CAD Objects
Snaps
. See Angle Snapping on
page 784.
New Visual CAD snapping displays possible snap points for CAD-based objects.
See Grid Snapping on page 785.
Tangent/End Arc
increase control of
arc creation. See Arc Tools on page
736.
, Start/
973
Whats New
in 10.0
New extension line snaps. See Extension Line Snapping on page 783.
Pictures,
Images, & Movies
New customizable reference grid displays in floor plan view. See Plan
Defaults on page 91.
Advanced
Design & Editing
974
Center sheet command allows you to center your plan relative to the drawing
sheet. See Center Sheet on page 888.
DXF/DWG
975
Whats New
in 10.0
Objects can be precisely positioned relative to the paper edge using the dimension tools. See Moving Objects Using
Dimensions on page 690.
Layout Files
976
Layout files are no longer tied to a particular printer. The current printer can be
changed at any time using the Page
Setup dialog. Printer and print settings
can also be specified at any time. See
Page Setup Dialog on page 898.
Layouts can be printed across multiple
sheets on any size paper for full scale
check plots. See Printing Across Multiple Pages on page 894.
Schedules
Materials Lists
Numerics
Absolute Location
Move point ........................................ 751
New line end ............................. 729 , 737
New point ......................................... 749
Activate Camera ............................... 636
Active Cameras ................................. 646
Add
a Gable Over Doors ........................... 219
a Molding Profile ............................... 569
a New Library .................................... 568
a New Symbol ................................... 568
Extension Lines ................................. 688
Floor Between Existing Floors ............ 269
Floors ............................................... 269
Images to the Library ......................... 834
New Layout Lines .............................. 917
Road Objects to the Library ............... 540
Textures, Images, and Backdrops to the
Library ........................................... 569
to the Library ..................................... 568
Tool Buttons ........................................ 18
Adding................................................ 269
Adjust
Lights ............................................... 666
Overviews ......................................... 631
the Height ......................................... 436
the View Angle .................................. 631
Adjust Lights Dialog ........................ 666
Adjust Material Definition................ 604
Adjust Wall Angle ..................... 107 , 140
Advanced Duplicate CAD Blocks ... 850
Advanced Layer Mapping ................ 847
Advanced Render Tab ...................... 613
Aerial View ........................................ 621
977
Index
Index
Align
Curved Stairs Between Floors ............ 352
Curved stairs between floors .............. 352
Curved Walls Between Floors ............ 154
Curved walls between floors .............. 154
Ends of Curved Stairs ........................ 350
Ends of curved stairs to walls or CAD . 350
Roof Edges ....................................... 306
Stem Walls and Footings ................... 279
Text .................................................. 708
Walls ........................................ 153 154
Walls between floors ......................... 167
978
Architectural
Architectural
Architectural
Archive Files
B
Backclipped Cross Section Tool ..... 625
Backdrop
Add new .................................... 648 , 834
Create ....................................... 648 , 834
Definition ........................................... 657
Backdrops .................................. 592 , 657
Backdrops Library ............................ 575
Background
Colors ................................................ 96
Render ...................................... 648 , 657
Balconies............................................ 192
Balcony
Room label ........................................ 193
Balusters ............................................ 174
Base Cabinets.................................... 458
979
Index
Break
798
798
799
139
Brick Veneer ...................................... 542
Bridging ............................................. 380
Build
Additional Floors ............................... 269
Ceiling Framing ................................. 378
Foundation ................................ 270 , 274
House ............................................... 811
New floor .......................................... 269
new floor ........................................... 269
Terrain .............................................. 500
Wall Framing ..................................... 378
Build Framing Dialog ....................... 382
Build Menu .......................................... 29
Build Roof Dialog ............................. 319
Building Codes ................................. 813
Built-in Fixtures
Create .............................................. 587
Delete ............................................... 587
Buttons
3D Toolbar .......................................... 62
Edit Toolbar ........................................ 65
C
Cabinet
Defaults ............................................ 458
Handles ............................................ 461
Labels .............................................. 463
980
CAD
981
Index
982
983
Index
984
Curved
Deck Railing ......................................
Roofs ................................................
Stairs ................................. 338 , 345 ,
Stairs Made Tangent .........................
Stairs, Change Radius .......................
Treads ..............................................
Wall Tools .........................................
Walls ........................................ 144 ,
Walls and Roofs ................................
Walls, Draw ......................................
Walls, Edit ........................................
133
328
349
352
353
360
133
152
161
141
148
Custom Counter Tops ...................... 459
Custom Counterholes ...................... 460
Custom Countertop
Specification Dialog...................... 486
Custom Countertops, Edit ............... 469
Custom Muntins........................ 219 , 243
Custom Shaped Landings ............... 345
Customize Toolbars ....................... 3 , 18
Cylinders ........................................... 579
D
Dash
Add to dimensions ............................. 696
Decimal feet ...................................... 779
Deck ................................................... 163
Ceiling over ....................................... 163
Create .............................................. 163
Room label ....................................... 193
Deck Designer ................................... 137
Deck Railing ...................................... 189
Deck Railing Defaults ...................... 183
Deck Railings .................................... 132
Decks .................................. 132 , 189 , 192
Default Lights.................................... 661
Default Origin Locations ................. 864
Default Settings .................................. 88
Defaults
Arrow ................................................ 715
Cabinet ............................... 88 , 458 , 487
985
Index
Define
Light Types ....................................... 665
Line Weight ....................................... 888
986
697
697
167
683
697
696
697
697
697
690
688
687
690
146
697
693
697
698
697
683
697
891
697
690
697
697
690
699
699
698
685
Dining Room ..................................... 192
Directories ......................................... 102
Display
3D Views .......................................... 632
Arc Centers ........................ 141 , 352 , 780
Arc Ends ........................................... 780
Architectural Blocks ........................... 556
Cabinet Module Lines ........................ 463
Cabinets ........................................... 462
CAD Objects ..................................... 752
Center of curved wall ......................... 141
Control Handles ................................ 769
Dimension Lines ................................ 686
Doors ............................................... 211
Electrical ........................................... 437
Foundations ...................................... 278
987
Index
988
E
Earth Data Tab ..................................
Eaves..................................................
Plumb cut .........................................
Square cut ........................................
Edge Lines.........................................
Automatic Edge Lines ........................
Edit
Architectural Blocks ...........................
Arcs Using Handles ...........................
Bay Box, and Bow Windows ...............
Cabinet Door Style ............................
Cabinets ...........................................
Callouts ............................................
Components Dialog ...........................
Curved Walls ....................................
Custom Countertops ..........................
667
392
323
323
863
863
560
766
244
469
467
718
949
148
469
989
Index
990
816
817
820
820
820
820
Copy plan
Copy, hold position between floors .....
Copy, reflected ..................................
Copy/Paste .......................................
Delete area .......................................
Delete contents of plan ......................
Delete floor .......................................
Hold position .....................................
821
821
820
819
819
819
821
Edit Camera
In 3D views ....................................... 627
In floor plan view ............................... 629
Explode
Architectural Blocks ........................... 558
Block .......................................... 67 , 753
Export................................................. 843
2D DXF/DWG Files ............................ 852
3D DXF, Color or Material Indicator .... 857
3D DXF/DWG Model .......................... 856
an Entire Plan ..................................... 84
Drawing File ...................................... 853
DWG ................................................ 852
DXF, 2D layers .................................. 854
DXF, 3D model .................................. 856
Layers Sets ....................................... 127
Layout Files ...................................... 921
Materials ........................................... 950
Materials List ............................ 950 951
Metafile ............................................. 837
Picture files ....................................... 828
Render view ...................................... 658
to POV-Ray ....................................... 680
VRML ............................................... 840
VRML Files ....................................... 840
Wall Definitions ................................. 160
Windows Metafiles ............................ 837
WMF ................................................. 837
Exposed Beams ................................ 198
Extend .................................. 67 , 798 799
Fence ....................................... 765 , 800
Handle, curved wall ........................... 150
Objects ............................................. 799
Extend Slope Downward.................. 290
Extension Lines, Edit ....................... 688
Extension Tab ................................... 694
Extensions Tab ................................. 700
Exterior
Deck ................................................. 163
Dimensions ....................................... 685
Door, threshold ................................. 814
Room type ........................................ 192
Rooms .............................................. 192
Walls ................................. 131 , 133 , 167
Exterior Fixtures Library ................. 577
Exterior Furnishings Library........... 578
Exterior Rooms ................................. 192
External only ..................................... 698
991
Index
F
F6 key
Fill window ........................................ 616
Family Room ..................................... 192
Fascia ................................................. 392
Roof ................................................. 392
Top ........................................... 328 , 330
Faster Raytracing ............................. 678
Faster Rendering .............................. 659
Fence.......................................... 765 , 800
Fencing ...................................... 132 , 138
Fencing Defaults......................... 90 , 183
Field of View............... 642 , 645 , 656 , 840
File Menu ............................................. 23
Fill
Polyline ..................................... 743 , 745
Fill Style Tab ..................................... 743
Fill Window ........................................ 616
Fillers ................................................. 474
Fillet ................................................... 800
Button ................................................. 67
CAD edit type .................................... 787
Notes ................................................ 787
Fillet/Chamfer Dialog ....................... 801
Filter Data .......................................... 525
Final View ........................... 114 , 650 , 654
Finding Files from an
Opened Layout .............................. 920
Fire Box Tab ...................................... 552
Fireplace ...................................... 66 , 549
Chimneys .......................................... 554
Depth ............................................... 550
Dimensions, suppress ....................... 551
Direction facing ................................. 549
Foundations ...................................... 550
Freestanding ............................. 549 , 924
Hearth height .................................... 551
Interior wall ....................................... 549
Library .............................................. 552
Masonry .................................... 549 , 924
No Fire Box ....................................... 552
992
275
275
275
172
Footprint, Plan .................................. 760
Foundation ............................................ 2
Foundation Defaults ................... 89 , 273
Foundation Tab ......................... 171 , 274
Foundation Walls...................... 131 , 133
Foundations ...................................... 274
Alignment ......................................... 279
and Room Specification ............. 193 , 282
Automatic ......................................... 274
Below Garage ................................... 282
Build blank plan ................................. 274
Build from 1st floor ............................ 274
Center footings (2 methods) ............... 172
Create .............................................. 274
Delete ............................................... 278
Display ............................................. 278
Edit Pier and Grade Beam ................. 281
Footing width and height .................... 172
Footings specification ........................ 275
Height ............................................... 188
How room name affects ..................... 282
Monolithic slab .................................. 276
Piers specification ............................. 278
Piers, add manually ........................... 280
Piers, automatic ................................ 276
Piers, edit ......................................... 280
Room supplies floor ........................... 205
Set up ............................................... 274
Slab at top of stem wall ..................... 275
Slab, monolithic ......................... 276 , 279
Slab, normal ...................................... 279
Slabs, create two ways ...................... 279
Stem wall .......................................... 275
Thickness ......................................... 172
Turn wall into .................................... 166
Types ............................................... 275
Use Mesh ......................................... 277
Wall .................................................. 171
Fractional Format ............................. 779
Frame and Trim Tab ......................... 223
Framing ...................................... 745 746
and the Materials List ........................ 403
993
Index
Drawing .............................................. 11
Floor Plan View ........................... 12 , 879
Floor Plan View Template ................ 926
Floor Plan Views and
CAD Details............................. 909 , 912
Floor Tools ......................................... 268
Floor/Ceiling Beam ........................... 379
Floor/Ceiling Truss ........................... 379
Floor/Ceiling Truss
Specification Dialog ...................... 427
Floors
Adding ............................................... 269
Calculate From All .............................. 939
Change Floor/Reference .................... 271
Copying ............................................. 270
Current floor .............................. 268 , 270
Deleting ............................................. 270
Exchange With Floor Above ................ 270
Exchange With Floor Below ................ 270
Floor Up/ Floor Down ......................... 271
FloorTabs .......................................... 383
Insert New Floor ................................ 269
Multiple ............................................. 268
Reference Floor ................................. 271
Reference floor .................................. 268
Swap Floor/Reference ........................ 272
Follow Terrain............ 513 , 522 , 544 , 594
Font Preferences ................................ 97
Fonts ................................................... 704
Choosing ........................................... 704
Different ............................................ 704
Dimensions .................................. 97 , 701
Materials List ............................... 97 , 946
Multiple ............................................. 704
Setup ................................................ 704
Text .................................................... 97
Toolbar ............................................... 97
Footings ............................................. 275
Alignment .......................................... 279
Centered on main layer ...................... 172
Centered on wall ................................ 172
Foundation ........................................ 275
Height ....................................... 172 , 188
Stem wall ........................................... 279
Stepped ............................................. 163
994
G
Gable
Dormer Over Windows and Doors ....... 318
H
Half walls see Railings, solid
Hallways ............................................. 192
Hand Rail Tab .................................... 179
Handles
Cabinets ............................................ 461
Center, curved walls ........................... 149
Curvature, curved wall ........................ 149
Curved stairs ..................................... 344
Curved walls, locked center ................ 150
Extend, curved walls .......................... 150
For wall fireplace ........................ 549 , 924
for Curved Stairs ................................ 341
for Merged Stairs ............................... 341
for Straight Stairs ............................... 341
Move, curved walls ............................. 149
on Curved Walls ................................. 148
Resize, curved walls .......................... 151
Stairs ................................................ 344
Wall offset ......................................... 154
Wall offset, curved ............................. 150
Handrail Tab....................................... 374
Hardiness Zone Maps ....................... 499
Hardware............................................ 650
Hardware Library .............................. 579
Hardware Tab
for Cabinets ...................................... 482
for Doors ........................................... 227
Hatch
DXF .................................................. 181
Patterns .................................... 743 , 745
Polyline ..................................... 743 , 745
Walls ................................................ 138
Hatch Wall ................................. 132 , 138
Headers .............................................. 389
Solid ................................................. 389
Thickness ......................................... 389
Type ................................................. 389
Headers Tab ...................................... 389
Hearth
Depth ............................................... 551
Height ............................................... 551
Height
Basement ceiling ............................... 275
Ceiling .............................................. 202
Ceiling on floor below ........................ 203
Diagram ............................................ 188
Dimension numbers, printing .............. 697
Floor for room ................................... 202
Footing ............................................. 188
Foundation ........................................ 188
Railings ............................................ 177
Restore, walls ................................... 152
Help
Display ................................................. 5
Menu .................................................. 61
Online ................................................. 16
Tips .................................................... 16
Help Tips.............................................. 16
High Shed/Gable ............................... 292
Hill ...................................................... 495
Hip Roof ..................................... 247 , 292
Hip Truss ........................................... 417
see also Trusses
Hold Position Button........................ 821
Holes
In slab .............................................. 280
995
Index
I
Icons
Arrange ............................................ 620
Ignore Subsection Boundaries ....... 355
I-joist ................... 384 , 390 , 392 , 404 , 406
Image Adustment Dialog ................. 676
Image Specification Dialog ............. 834
Images........................................ 593 , 657
3D, add ............................................. 834
Add new ........................................... 834
Copy ................................................. 833
Create .............................................. 834
Definition .................................. 580 , 657
Displaying ......................................... 832
In Layout .......................................... 833
Move ................................................ 833
Place ................................................ 832
Print ......................................... 658 , 902
Resize .............................................. 833
Select from library ..................... 504 , 835
Transparent color .............................. 836
View ................................................. 832
Images and Backdrops .................... 657
Images Library .................................. 579
Imperial .............................................. 696
Plans ................................................ 891
see Units
Import
2D DXF/DWG Files ........................... 844
3D Data ............................................ 860
DWG ................................................ 844
DXF/DWG Elevation Data .................. 527
Layer Sets ........................................ 127
Picture Files ...................................... 826
Terrain Data ...................................... 523
Wall Definitions ................................. 161
Wall layers ........................................ 161
996
J
Jack Trusses see Trusses
Join Roof Planes............................... 306
Joist .................................................... 379
Joist and Rafter Blocking ................ 380
Joist Blocking ................................... 380
Joist Direction ................................... 380
Joist Direction Line .................. 397 398
Joist Direction
Specification Dialog ...................... 397
Joist Orientation ............................... 382
K
Keeping Layout Views
Current ............................................ 912
Keyboard Camera
Movements...................................... 628
Keyboard Commands................... 8 , 572
Kidney Shaped Terrain
Feature ............................................ 496
Kingpost ..................................... 393 , 425
Kitchen Island.................................... 471
Kitchens ............................................. 192
Knee Wall ........................................... 290
L
Label Tab ............................................ 485
Labels
Cabinet .............................................. 463
Room ................................................ 193
Room, automatic ................................ 814
Truss ................................................. 412
Trusses ............................................. 412
Landing
Height ............................................... 346
Stair .................................................. 345
997
Index
998
999
Index
Weight ................................................ 96
LinesTo Arc button ............................ 68
Lites
Craftsman ......................................... 260
Diamond ................................... 225 , 260
Normal ...................................... 225 , 260
Prairie ....................................... 225 , 260
Lites Tab .................................... 224 , 259
Living Area ................. 192 , 194 195 , 208
Calculated ................................ 192 , 194
Deleting ............................................ 194
Label ................................................ 194
Restoring .......................................... 194
vs. Footprint ...................................... 194
vs. Square footage ............................ 194
Living Area vs. Footprint................. 194
Living Rooms .................................... 192
Load Same for Rooms...................... 201
Load the 3D File................................ 862
Load to Make Same Value ............... 816
Locate
Dimensions will find ........................... 683
External only ..................................... 698
Openings, automatically ..................... 697
Walls, both surfaces .......................... 698
Walls, centers ................................... 698
Walls, surfaces .................................. 698
Locate Objects Tab .......................... 698
Locate Roof Plane Intersections .... 311
Lock
CAD layer ......................................... 121
Center of curved walls ....................... 148
Center, curved wall type .................... 148
Roof planes ...................................... 321
Lock Center Arc ................................ 767
Lock Center Button .......................... 148
Lock Center Edit Button .................. 148
Lock Tread Width ............................. 355
Locked Landings .............................. 346
Locked Tread Width ......................... 349
Lookout .............................................. 392
Low Detail Mode ....................... 634 , 653
1000
M
Macros ................................................ 709
Main
Layer surfaces ................................... 698
Main Layer ................................. 159 , 182
Maintaining Tread Width .................. 354
Make Arc Tangent ............................. 768
Edit button ........................................ 154
Make Block ........................................ 753
Make Parallel/Perpendicular............ 796
Make Room Molding
Polyline Dialog............................... 200
Making a Reflective Copy
with Edit Area ................................ 821
Manage
Materials ........................................... 600
Manage Auto Archives ....................... 76
Managing Materials Lists ................. 950
Manual Dimensions .......................... 683
Manual framing ................................. 377
Manual Framing vs.
Automatic Framing ........................ 378
Manual reach
Dimensions ....................................... 697
Manual Roofs ............................ 286 , 295
Manufacturers ................................... 950
Map
to a Single Layer ............................... 847
to Multiple Layers .............................. 847
Marker Defaults ................................... 89
Marker Specification Dialog ............ 723
Marker Tab ......................................... 723
Markers .............................................. 722
CAD .................................................. 753
Create ............................................... 722
Deleting ............................................ 722
Edit ................................................... 722
Marquee ................................................. 9
Masonry .............................................. 554
Fireplace ................................... 549 , 924
see also Fireplace
Stairs ................................................ 365
Master Bathrooms ............................. 192
Master Bedrooms .............................. 192
Master List ................................... 66 , 941
Columns to display ............................. 112
Materials List ............................. 112 , 942
Name of file ....................................... 112
Master list
see also Materials List
Master plan see Profile Plan
Match the Center and Radius .......... 354
Material
Categories, Display ............................ 947
Material Defaults ......................... 89 , 614
Material Definition ............................. 605
Material Export Options Dialog ....... 950
Material Eyedropper.......................... 602
Material List Display
Options Dialog ............................... 947
Material Painter ................................. 602
Material Tab ....................................... 603
Materials ................. 3 , 587 , 656 , 874 , 877
and Raytracing ................................... 676
Applying with Material Tab .................. 603
Calculating, on soffits ......................... 543
Calculation ........................................ 543
Categories ......................................... 608
Color ................................................. 606
Define for Materials List ...................... 600
Editing ............................................... 604
Export ............................................... 950
in a Render View ................................ 656
Library ............................................... 580
Materials List ..................................... 600
OBJ files ............................................ 877
Polyline .............................................
Render properties .............................
Rules for calculating on soffits ...........
Rules for calculation ..........................
Textures ...........................................
941
612
543
543
611
1001
Index
Medians.............................................. 534
Menus..................................................... 6
3D ...................................................... 43
Build ................................................... 29
CAD ................................................... 46
Help ................................................... 61
Window ............................................... 59
Merging Stair Sections .................... 348
Mesh
Specify for foundation ........................ 277
Metafiles ............................................ 837
Metric
Dimensions ....................................... 696
Display ............................................. 779
Plans ................................................ 892
see also Units
Middle button
Definition ...................................... 5 , 616
Millwork
Library .............................................. 580
Minimum
Number Size ..................................... 697
Minimum Alcove ............................... 322
Mirror
Area see Edit Area, Reflect
Mitre Ends of Angle Walls ............... 386
Mixing Trusses with
Stick Framing................................. 413
Model Maker ...................................... 923
Printing ............................................. 923
Modify a Plan Database File.............. 82
Modify All Layer Sets ....................... 127
Molding .............................................. 185
3D Molding Line tool .......................... 448
3D molding polyline ........................... 448
Above cabinets ................................. 204
Baseboard ................................ 203 , 208
Chair rail ................................... 203 , 208
Changing profiles .............................. 451
Crown ....................................... 203 , 208
Custom ............................................. 569
Defining ............................................ 204
Door ................................................. 228
Drawing ............................................ 569
1002
Molding Polyline
Specification Dialog ...................... 451
Molding Polylines ............................. 447
Displaying ......................................... 450
Molding Profile, Adding ................... 569
Molding Tab
for Floor Defaults ............................... 208
Moldings and Profiles
Library..................................... 449 , 581
Moldings Tab
for Cabinets ...................................... 484
for Doors ........................................... 228
for Molding Polylines .......................... 452
for Rooms ......................................... 203
for Soffits .......................................... 545
for Windows ...................................... 264
Monolithic Slab ................................. 276
Monolithic Slab Foundations,
Rebuilding ...................................... 280
Mouse ..................................................... 5
Move
and Resize Framing in Elevation and 3D
Views ............................................. 402
Architectural Blocks ........................... 559
Cabinet Labels .................................. 464
Cabinets ........................................... 465
Cabinets, restrictions ......................... 466
CAD Object with Dimensions .............. 690
CAD Objects ............................. 789 , 791
CAD point ......................................... 751
CAD Point to Point ............................... 67
CAD Points ....................................... 751
Callouts ............................................ 719
Control key ........................................ 241
N
Name
Of room for plancheck ....................... 813
Room ................................................ 202
1003
Index
North Pointer.....................................
Number
Height, definition ...............................
Height, dimensions ............................
Number Style/Angle Style Dialog ...
730
779
697
759
O
OBJ Files ........................................... 877
Object Snapping ............................... 780
Object Specification Dialog ............ 602
Object-Based Design ........................... 2
Offices................................................ 192
Offset
Curved wall handles .......................... 150
Dimensions, first line ......................... 697
Handles ............................................ 153
Handles, walls ................................... 154
Wall handles, curved ......................... 150
One Stretch Plane............................. 872
One-Click Auto Dimension .............. 685
Open
2nd floor plan ...................................... 77
3D Home Architect files ....................... 72
Different file types ............................... 77
Directory ............................................. 77
Files from a different version ................ 77
Last four plans recently opened ........... 78
Plan .................................................... 77
Polyline, definition ............................. 727
Open Below ....................................... 192
Open Object ................................ 10 , 591
Open Symbol ........ 28 , 571 , 592 , 880 881
Opening a Plan or Layout File .......... 77
Opening Tab ...................................... 882
Opening Template Files ..................... 79
Openings ................................... 878 879
Dimension locate ............................... 697
Dimensions to ................................... 699
Doorways, create ...................... 878 879
Ignore casing for resize ....................... 92
Size .................................................. 387
1004
P
Pads
Edit ................................................... 281
Page
Down ................................................ 906
1005
Index
Up ..................................................... 906
Page Setup Dialog ............................. 898
Pan
Display .............................................. 616
the Display ........................................ 616
Using arrow keys ............................... 616
Using Control key ............................... 616
Using scroll bars ................................ 616
Paper
Orientation ......................................... 898
Size ................................................... 904
Paper Orientation .............................. 898
Parallel Light...................................... 665
see Lights .......................................... 663
Parallel/Perpendicular ................ 67 , 790
Illustrated .......................................... 796
Parent Buttons.................................... 18
Partial break....................................... 799
Partition .............................................. 459
Path
To Master list ..................................... 112
Pattern Tab......................................... 610
Perspective Views ............................. 624
Zoom ................................................. 633
Perspectives and
Overviews ............................... 911 , 913
Picture File Box
Specification Dialog ...................... 829
Picture Files
Export ............................................... 828
Import ................................................ 826
Scale ................................................. 827
Picture, Save a Render View............ 658
Pier and Grade Beam Foundations,
Edit .................................................. 281
Piers .................................................... 276
Automatic .......................................... 278
Beam, relationship ............................. 281
Create automatically .......................... 278
Create manually ................................. 280
Delete ............................................... 281
Edit ................................................... 280
Manually add ..................................... 280
Plans
Copy files ............................................
Create a new plan ...............................
New ....................................................
Open ..................................................
Save ...................................................
Search ................................................
Transfer ..............................................
84
72
72
77
73
80
84
Plant Chooser Dialog ....................... 507
Plant Encyclopedia .......................... 507
Plant Image Specification
Dialog.............................................. 503
Plants
Library .............................................. 581
Plates ................................................. 386
Platform Holes .................................. 280
Platforms
Cape Cod, combine ........................... 398
Combine floor and ceiling .................. 398
Thickness, information ....................... 203
Plinth Blocks ..................................... 221
Plot plan
North pointer ..................................... 730
Plotters
Ink Jet Plotters .................................. 885
Test .................................................. 897
Types ............................................... 885
Plumb Cut Eaves .............................. 323
Point
see also CAD point
Point Light ......................................... 665
Point Markers .................................... 750
Point to Point
Dimensions ....................................... 683
Move, Area ....................................... 819
Point to Point Dimensions .............. 684
Pointer
Coordinates ............................ 6 , 95 , 765
Cross Hair ........................................ 101
Pointers and Arrows ........................ 718
Points ................................................. 749
Point-to-Point Move ......................... 790
1006
Point-to-Point Move
with Edit Area ................................ 819
Polyline .............................................. 727
3D molding polyline ........................... 448
Adjust ............................................... 787
Area .................................................. 741
Auto snap .......................................... 777
Definition ................................... 727 , 741
Edit Area ........................................... 817
Reshape ........................................... 787
Stretch .............................................. 787
Tool to create rectangular .................. 745
Polyline Intersection ........................ 803
Polyline Solid .................................... 547
Display .............................................. 547
Polyline Solid Specification
Dialog .............................................. 548
Polyline Specification Dialog .......... 741
Polyline Subtract .............................. 804
Polyline Tab ....................................... 741
Polyline Union ................................... 802
Polylines
Molding Polyline tool .......................... 447
Pony Wall Defaults ........................... 182
Pony Walls ......................... 131 , 134 , 151
Change wall types ............................. 135
Create ............................................... 134
Display .............................................. 142
Pony walls
see also Railings, solid
Porch
Room label ........................................ 193
Porches .............................................. 192
Post .................................................... 380
Post Specification Dialog ................ 406
Posts/Beams Tab .............................. 390
POV-Ray ............................................. 679
Prairie style
see Lites
Preferences ................................. 90 , 571
3D .................................................... 645
CAD .................................................. 776
CAD Snaps ....................................... 780
Q
Quoin Specification Dialog ............. 446
Quoins................................................ 445
R
Radius ........................................ 142 , 736
Radius of Curved Stairs, Change ... 353
Radius To .......................................... 168
Rafter Blocking ................................. 380
Rafter depth ...................................... 329
Rafters ....................................... 379 , 392
and Trusses ...................................... 382
Automatically create .......................... 381
Common ........................................... 420
Depth ....................................... 331 , 382
Depth, individual roof plane ............... 331
Draw new, manually .......................... 379
General ............................................ 401
Height ............................................... 379
Mixing with trusses ............................ 413
Trusses mix ...................................... 381
see also Framing
Railing
Balusters .......................................... 177
Newels ............................................. 177
Railing Defaults .......................... 90 , 183
Railing Tab ........................................ 174
Railings ...................................... 132 , 136
Balusters .......................................... 174
Change wall into railing ..................... 166
Connect walls ................................... 153
Curved, jumpy when drawing ............. 141
Exterior Materials .............................. 176
Fix connections ................................. 153
1007
Index
Color .................................................. 96
Contextual menus ............................... 95
Global settings .................................... 94
Reset preferences .............................. 118
Show line weight ................................. 96
174
177
167
144
175
176
175
175
218
176
143
174
364
174
Raise
Off plate ............................................ 322
Off plate, truss .................................. 426
Shoe ................................................. 176
1008
Color ................................................... 96
Reference Floor Color ........................ 96
Reference Grid .................................... 93
Reflect
Area see Edit Area
Reflect About Line ............................ 795
Reflect About Line with Edit Area .. 820
Reflect Tools ............................. 436 , 468
Refresh Display................................... 59
Refresh Library Browser.................. 568
Regenerate Framing ......................... 402
Relative
to Current Point, new line end ............ 729
to Current Point, new point ................. 749
to Current Point, polar, new line end ... 729
to Current point, polar, new point ........ 750
to Itself, move point ........................... 751
to Previous Point, move point ............. 752
Relocate Objects Using
Dimensions .................................... 690
Remove 3D ................................... 66 , 636
Remove Backdrop............................. 648
Remove Deck Framing ..................... 189
Remove Muntins ............................... 244
Render
Added Lights ..................................... 663
Ambient light ..................................... 660
Create a Render View ........................ 652
Daytime Ambient ............................... 661
Display light sources .................. 441 , 671
Export view ....................................... 658
Field of view ...................... 642 , 645 , 656
Final ................................................. 655
Floor Overview .......................... 652 , 673
Graphics card .................................... 650
Interior Ambient ................................. 661
Light Fixtures .................................... 662
Light Sources .................................... 660
Light sources ..................................... 660
Nighttime Ambient ............................. 661
Overviews ................................. 652 , 673
Preferences ....................................... 114
Preview ............................................. 655
Save view ......................................... 658
Render Camera
Edit ................................................... 627
Field of View .............................. 642 , 645
Render Data Tab ........................ 439 , 668
Render Full Overview ............... 652 , 673
Render Preferences .......................... 114
Render Settings ................................. 115
Render Tab ......................................... 612
Render Tips and Tricks .................... 659
Render Tools ..................................... 650
Render Views ..................................... 652
Ediiting Objects in .............................. 658
Repair Broken Walls ......................... 153
Replace from Library Button ........... 573
Replace from Library Dialog ............ 573
Replicate Object ........................ 435 , 465
Report style
Grid display settings ........................... 111
Materials List ..................................... 111
see also Materials List
Rescale
Layout view ....................................... 915
Rescale Views.................................... 915
Reset Defaults .............................. 90 , 93
Reset Preferences ............................. 118
Reset to Defaults ................................ 93
Reshape Splines................................ 768
Reshape Text ..................................... 707
Resize
(Proportional) ..................................... 787
an Image ........................................... 833
Cabinet .............................................. 466
Cabinets ............................................ 466
Callouts ............................................. 719
Components ...................................... 244
Corner Boards ........................... 444 445
Corner cabinet ................................... 467
Restore
Toolbars ............................................. 23
Wall heights in 3D ............................. 152
Restrictions
Move door ......................................... 214
Move stairs ....................................... 343
Retain
Attic wall ........................................... 167
Wall Framing ..................................... 168
Retaining Wall ................................... 132
Reverse
Wall layers ................................ 167 168
Reverse Direction ............................. 796
Reverse Plan ..................................... 823
Multiple Floors ............................ 54 , 823
Ridge .................................................. 392
Top, edit roofs ........................... 328 , 330
Right button
Definition .............................................. 5
Right-click ......................................... 461
Rim Joist............................................ 384
Road and Sidewalk Defaults ........... 529
Road Defaults ..................................... 89
Road Marking .................................... 532
Road Marking Specification
Dialog.............................................. 539
1009
Index
Road Objects
Delete ............................................... 533
Different Types .................................. 530
Display ............................................. 533
Edit ................................................... 533
Select ............................................... 533
Road Polyline .................................... 530
Road Specification Dialog ............... 536
Road Stripe........................................ 531
Road Stripes and Markings ............. 535
Roads ................................................. 530
Roads and Road Polylines .............. 534
Roof Baseline Specification
Dialog.............................................. 325
Roof Baseline Tab ............................ 326
Roof Baselines.......................... 293 , 296
Edit ................................................... 293
Using ................................................ 294
Roof Beam ......................................... 379
Roof Defaults .................................... 286
Roof Framing .................................... 378
Roof Group ........................................ 203
Roof Hole/Skylight Specification
Dialog.............................................. 334
Roof Mode ......................................... 288
Roof Over a Curved Wall ................. 161
Roof Plane ......................................... 288
Low roof planes ................................. 321
Roof Plane Intersections,
Locate ............................................. 311
Roof Plane Specification
Dialog.............................................. 326
Roof Planes ............................... 288 , 295
Delete ............................................... 303
Display ............................................. 302
Edit ................................................... 304
Roof Styles, Automatically
Generated ....................................... 288
Roof Tab .................................... 170 , 391
Roof Tools ......................................... 287
Roof Truss ................................. 379 , 408
1010
Rotate
an Area .............................................
Architectural Blocks ...........................
Area, see Edit Area
Cabinet, individual ..................... 466 ,
Cabinets ...........................................
Cabinets, multiple ...................... 466 ,
CAD items ........................................
Electrical ...........................................
Electrical Objects ..............................
Jump ................................................
Markers ............................................
Plan View .........................................
Scaled Views ....................................
Stairs ................................................
Text ..................................................
View .................................................
818
559
559
466
559
777
435
435
777
722
822
914
344
707
822
Rotate/Resize About ........................ 776
Rough Opening ................................. 387
Doorways (ISD) ......................... 878 879
Windows (ISD) .......................... 878 879
1011
Index
S
Same Wall Type ........................ 107 , 140
Sash and Frame Tab ........................ 254
Save
3D Cameras ...................................... 635
Bitmap ...................................... 626 , 651
Cross Section/Elevation Cameras ...... 639
Plan .............................................. 73 74
Plan and Layout Files .......................... 73
Plan Thumbnail ................................... 74
Render View Picture .......................... 658
Section/Elevation Cameras ................ 639
see also Autosave
Save and Save As ............................... 74
Saved Cameras ................................. 646
Scale
Layout view ....................................... 915
Print ................................................. 892
Scale Data.......................................... 526
Scale Picture Files ........................... 827
Scale to Fit ........................................ 893
Scale, Print to ................................... 892
Schedule Defaults ...................... 89 , 927
Schedule Example ............................ 935
Schedule Specification
Dialog.............................................. 928
Schedules to Text, Convert ............. 935
Schedules, Create ............................ 928
Schematics, Wiring .......................... 432
Scissor Truss .................................... 422
Scroll bars ......................................... 617
Pan .................................................. 616
Search for Plans ................................. 80
Search the Master List ..................... 943
Section see Cross section
Section/Elevation
Views, Create ................................... 637
Views, Detailing ................................ 638
1012
Select
Architectural Blocks ........................... 557
Blocked Units .................................... 238
Cabinets ........................................... 461
CAD Objects ..................................... 765
CAD Objects Using a Fence ............... 765
Callouts ............................................ 718
Click method ......................................... 9
Components ...................................... 557
Components of Blocked Units ............. 239
Dimension Lines ................................ 686
Door, individual ................................. 212
Doors ................................................ 212
Doors, multiple .................................. 212
Edit same type item ............................. 10
Electrical Objects ............................... 434
Group, drag method ............................... 8
Group, marquee method ........................ 8
Layout Lines ...................................... 916
Layout Views ..................................... 914
Library Objects .................................. 589
Markers ............................................. 722
Materials with the Material Tab ........... 603
Multiple Cabinets ............................... 461
Multiple CAD items ................................ 9
Multiple items ........................................ 9
Multiple Text Objects ......................... 707
Objects ................................................. 8
Objects in 3D Views ........................... 634
Road Objects .................................... 533
Room ........................................ 191 , 202
Select/Make Fence tool ...................... 765
Stacked Cabinets .............................. 462
Stairs ................................................ 340
Terrain Data ...................................... 501
Text .................................................. 706
Wall .................................................. 151
Walls in cross section ........................ 151
Walls, Railing, and Fences ................. 143
Windows ........................................... 238
Select
Select
Select
Select
Select
Select
1013
Index
1014
Stairwell.............................................. 163
Create ....................................... 163 , 365
Opening ............................................ 365
Standard Windows ............................ 232
Start Direction ................................... 737
Start House Wizard ........................... 810
Starter Tread ................................ 66 , 362
1015
Index
1016
T
Tab Key .................................................. 9
Tab Spacing ....................................... 709
Tabs
Changing .......................................... 713
Columns ............................................ 713
Easy spacing ..................................... 709
Text .................................................. 713
Take Off see Materials List
Tangent
Curved walls ..................................... 154
Make arc, edit button ......................... 154
Make Tangent button ........................... 68
Technical Support .................... 953 , 959
Template Plan.......................... 72 73 , 79
Creating .............................................. 80
Temporary File Directories .............. 102
Terms...................................................... 4
Terrain
and 3D Draw Time ............................. 500
Clear ................................................. 501
Copy ................................................. 501
Display in 3D View ............................. 500
Display in Floor Plan View .................. 499
Grow All Plants Dialog ....................... 498
Library .............................................. 583
Menu .................................................. 37
Retaining Wall ................................... 495
Sprinkler Tools .................................. 498
Text..................................................... 704
Arrows .............................................. 705
Auto Height, Width ............................ 714
CAD ................................................. 704
Column spacing ................................ 709
Convert Schedules to ........................ 935
Copy ................................................. 709
Create .............................................. 704
Cut ................................................... 709
Display ............................................. 706
Edit ................................................... 707
Hyperlinks ......................................... 714
in Layout ........................................... 908
Layer ................................................ 706
Line With Arrow ................................. 705
Macros ............................................. 709
Move ................................................ 707
Paste ................................................ 709
Reshape ........................................... 707
Restrictions ....................................... 704
Select ............................................... 706
Spacing for columns .......................... 709
Spell Check ...................................... 811
Tabs ................................................. 713
Text and Page Setup
Preferences ...................................... 99
Text Defaults ............................... 89 , 714
Text Files ........................................... 523
Text Specification Dialog ................ 711
Text Tab ............................................. 711
Texture Filters................................... 117
Texture Painter ......................... 625 , 651
Texture Tab ....................................... 611
Textures
Add new ........................................... 834
Apply to items ................................... 611
Apply to materials .............................. 611
Create .............................................. 834
Definition .......................................... 656
Filters ............................................... 117
View ................................................. 611
Textures Library ............................... 593
Thick lines ........................................... 96
Thickness
Bottom plate, wall .............................. 386
1017
Index
Terrain Data
1018
U
Undo
Files ................................................... 77
Preferences ...................................... 101
Undo zoom ....................................... 616
105
696
696
696
696
696
696
346
343
Update Cross
Sections/Elevations ...................... 913
Update Templates ............................... 80
Use Existing Roof ............................. 248
Use Framing Reference ........... 384 , 391
Use Mesh ........................................... 277
User Specified Walls ........................ 156
Utility Rooms .................................... 192
V
Valley ................................................. 495
Vector Cameras ................................ 624
Vector Floor Camera ........................ 626
Vertical Rafter Depth........................ 424
View Angle Dialog ............................ 631
View Direction Tools .................. 63 , 631
Viewing Images ................................. 832
Views
Cascade ........................................... 618
Virtual Graph Paper............................ 91
Visual CAD Snaps............................... 91
1019
Index
Volume
Materials ........................................... 608
VRML ..................................................
Export ...............................................
Images .............................................
Textures ...........................................
VRML use of Texture and
Image Files .....................................
841
840
841
841
841
W
Walk Line ........................................... 354
Displaying in Floor Plan View ............. 371
Walkthrough Recording Tools ........ 838
Walkthroughs ............................ 636 , 838
Play .................................................. 838
Record .............................................. 838
Show ................................................ 838
Wall
Framing ............................................ 378
Wall Assemblies ............................... 156
Wall Bridging .................................... 746
Wall Cabinets .................................... 458
Wall Corner Specification
Dialog.............................................. 444
Wall Defaults ............................... 90 , 130
Wall Defaults Dialog ......................... 181
Wall Definitions
Exporting .......................................... 160
Importing .......................................... 161
Wall Elevation ................................... 624
Wall Elevation Tool .......................... 625
Wall Framing Details ................ 386 , 400
Wall Framing Members,
Drawing .......................................... 401
Wall Hatch Specification
Dialog.............................................. 180
Wall Height Specification
Dialog.............................................. 152
Wall Heights ...................................... 147
Wall Layer .......................................... 181
1020
167
140
151
143
151
182
174
171
139
182
151
145
386
391
386
204
Walls In Section/Elevation .............. 143
Web Support ..................................... 957
Webbing ..................................... 425 , 428
Horizontal span ................................. 427
Wedge ................................................ 579
Winders
Create .............................................. 356
Winders, Creating ............................. 356
Window Defaults ................. 90 , 231 , 265
Window Levels .................................. 237
Window Menu ...................................... 59
Window Schedule Example ............. 935
Window Shutters .............................. 260
Window Specification Dialog .......... 249
Window Types ................................... 232
CAD Detail ........................................ 759
Windows ................................................ 8
Arch top (ISD) ................................... 879
Bay ................................................... 232
Bay Trimmers .................................... 388
Bay, gable roof .................................. 249
Bay, roof over ................................... 247
Bench seat ........................................ 247
Blocked ............................................ 219
Bow .................................................. 233
Bow, gable roof ................................. 249
Bow, roof over ................................... 247
Box, gable roof .................................. 249
1021
Index
1022
Z
Zoom................................................... 615
Closer ............................................... 615
Extents ............................................. 616
F6 key to fill window .......................... 616
Fill window/Fill Screen ....................... 616
General overview ............................... 615
Mouse wheel ..................................... 616
Perspective views .............................. 633
Undo ................................................. 616
Wheel Mouse ........................................ 5
Zoom Tools ........................................ 615
Zoom Window .................................... 621
Zooming in Perspective Views ........ 633
Zooming With the Mouse Wheel ..... 616